Contents Owner's Manual

for Vehicle

A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine®

cardiagn.com
THE BMW 7 SERIES.
OWNER'S MANUAL.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

cardiagn.com
7 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Handbook for Vehicle.
Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.

cardiagn.com
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride
BMW AG

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 cardiagn.com

© 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/15, 07 15 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 250 Refueling
page 302. 252 Fuel
254 Wheels and tires
271 Engine compartment
6 Information
273 Engine oil
At a glance 277 Coolant
14 Cockpit 279 Maintenance
19 Idle state, operating and drive readiness 281 Replacing components
21 iDrive 286 Breakdown assistance
30 BMW gesture control 291 Care

cardiagn.com
33 Voice activation system
Reference
36 BMW Touch Command
298 Technical data
38 General settings
301 Appendix
49 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle
302 Everything from A to Z
Controls
54 Opening and closing
76 Adjusting
93 Transporting children safely
97 Driving
113 Displays
129 Lights
136 Safety
163 Driving stability control systems
168 Driver assistance systems
200 Driving comfort
203 Climate control
215 Interior equipment
225 Storage compartments

Driving tips
234 Things to remember when driving
237 Loading
240 Saving fuel

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Information

Information
Using this Owner's Manual Symbols and displays
Orientation Symbols in the Owner's Manual
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Indicates precautions that must be followed
ular topic is by using the index. precisely in order to avoid the possibility of
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in personal injury and serious damage to the
the first chapter. vehicle.
◄ Marks the end of a specific item of
Updates made after the editorial information.
deadline Refers to measures that can be taken to
Any updates made after the editorial deadline help protect the environment.
can be found in the appendix of the printed "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to

cardiagn.com
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. select individual functions.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice
User's manual for Navigation,
activation system.
Entertainment, Communication
››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
voice activation system.
ment, and Communication is available as
printed book at your service center.
Action steps
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and
Action steps to be carried out are presented as
Communication can be retrieved on the Con‐
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
trol Display via the Integrated Owner's Manual
in the defined order.
and in the BMW Driver’s Guide app.
1. First action step.
2. Second action step.
Additional sources of
information Enumerations
A dealer’s service center or another qualified Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐
service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐ ternative possibilities are presented as list with
swer additional questions at any time. bullet points.
Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is ▷ First possibility.
available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. ▷ Second possibility.

BMW Driver’s Guide App Symbols on vehicle components

The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ Indicates that you should consult the
tries as an app. Additional information on the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
Internet: information on a particular part or assembly.
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

6
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Information

Vehicle features and options Own safety

This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Warranty
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series. Your vehicle is technically configured for the
Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ operating conditions and registration require‐
scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ ments applying in the country of first delivery
able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
lected optional features or the country-specific to be operated in a different country it might be
version. necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and permit re‐
This also applies to safety-related functions
quirements. If your vehicle does not comply
and systems.
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐
The respectively applicable country provisions tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐
must be observed when using the respective ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐
features and systems. formation on warranty is available from a
For any options and equipment not described dealer’s service center.

cardiagn.com
in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Handbooks. Maintenance and repairs
On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern
are arranged differently from what is shown in materials and high-performance electronics,
the illustrations. requires suitable maintenance and repair work.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
Status of the Owner's a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
Manual to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
mends use of a facility that performs work, e.g.
Basic information maintenance and repair, according to BMW
specifications with properly trained personnel,
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
referred to in this Owner's Manual as "another
policy of constant development that is con‐
qualified service center or repair shop".
ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ If work is performed improperly, e.g. mainte‐
dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ nance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent
scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from damage and related safety risks.
those in your vehicle.
Parts and accessories
Updates made after the editorial BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
deadline cessory products approved by BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline Approved parts and accessories, and advice
can be found in the appendix of the printed on their use and installation are available from
Owner's Handbook for Vehicle. a BMW dealer's service center.
BMW parts and accessories were tested by
BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
vehicles.

7
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Information

BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
sories. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐ Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
ual product from another manufacturer can be designed to meet the particular operating con‐
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a ditions and homologation requirements in your
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official country and continental region in order to de‐
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
whether these products are suitable for BMW is operated under those conditions. If you wish
vehicles under all usage conditions. to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐
California Proposition 65 Warning hicle to meet different prevailing operating
California laws require us to state the following conditions and homologation requirements.
warning: You should also be aware of any applicable
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
country or region. In such case, please contact
bile components and parts, including compo‐
Customer Relations for further information.
nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐

cardiagn.com
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
Maintenance
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects and reproductive harm. In addition, Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain road safety, operational reliability and the New
products of component wear contain or emit Vehicle Limited Warranty.
chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures:
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
for US models
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models
water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to
these specifications, this could result in seri‐
Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty.
lowing warranties:
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle
ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐
rarily or permanently store technical informa‐
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty.
tion about the condition of the vehicle, events
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally
ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a
Detailed information about these warranties is system or the environment:
listed in the Service and Warranty Information

8
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Information

▷ Operating mode of system components, fill tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
levels for instance. a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ The EDR is designed to record data related to
tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
transverse acceleration. short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
ing the stability control system. operating.

▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were fastened.
This data is purely technical in nature and is
used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

cardiagn.com
routes traveled cannot be created from this ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ These data can help provide a better under‐
pair services, service processes, warranty standing of the circumstances in which
claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ crashes and injuries occur.
mation can be read out from the event and
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
fault memories by employees of the dealer’s
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are
service center or another qualified service cen‐
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
ter or repair shop, including the manufacturer,
conditions and no personal data, e.g., name,
using special diagnostic tools. You can obtain
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
further information there if you need it. After an
error is corrected, the information in the fault However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
memory is deleted or overwritten on a continu‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the
ous basis. type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
With the vehicle in use there are situations
where you can associate these technical data To read data recorded by an EDR, special
with individuals if combined with other infor‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
the assistance of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
Additional functions that are contractually
the vehicle or the EDR.
agreed with the customer - such as vehicle
emergency locating - you can transmit certain
vehicle data from the vehicle.

Event Data Recorder EDR

This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐

9
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Information

Vehicle identification formation about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.
number
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

The vehicle identification number can be found

in the engine compartment.

The vehicle identification number can also be

found behind the windshield.

cardiagn.com
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐

10
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Information

cardiagn.com

11
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 cardiagn.com

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 At a glance
These overviews of buttons, switches and
displays are intended to familiarize you with your

cardiagn.com
vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted
with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 At a glance Cockpit

Cockpit
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

All around the steering wheel

1 Seating comfort features

Gentleman function  78
3 Safety switch for the windows
and roller sunblinds  71 cardiagn.com
4 Power windows  70
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel
memory  87
5 Exterior mirror operation  85
Massage function  88
6 Lights
Front fog lights  132
2 Roller sunblind in the rear win‐
dow  72
Night Vision  147

14
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Cockpit At a glance

Lights off Cruise control on/off  175

Automatic headlight con‐
trol  130
Active Cruise Control on/off  168
Daytime running lights  131
Parking lights  129
Resume speed   175 ,  168,

Automatic headlight con‐

Pause or continue cruise con‐
trol  130
trol   175 ,  168
Adaptive Light Control  131
High-beam Assistant  132 Increase distance  168
Low beams  129
Reduce distance  168
Instrument lighting  133

cardiagn.com
With steering and lane guidance
assistant: adjust speed  168
Right roadside parking
lamp  130 Steering and lane control assis‐
tant on/off  177
Left roadside parking lamp  130
Cruise control rocker switch   175,  168,

7 Central locking system 10 Instrument cluster  113

Unlocking  63 11 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source

Lock  63
Volume

8 Steering column stalk, left

Voice activation system  33
Turn signal  103

Telephone
High beams, head‐
light flasher  103
Thumbwheel for selection lists  121
High-beam Assistant  132
12 Steering column stalk, right

On-board computer  122

9 Steering wheel buttons, left

15
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance Cockpit

Wiper  103 14 Horn
15 Steering wheel heating  87
Rain sensor  104

16 Adjust steering wheel  87

Cleaning the windshield and
headlights  105
17 Unlock hood  272
13 Start/stop engine  97 18 Open/close trunk lid  64

Auto Start/Stop function  98

19 Glove compartment  226

cardiagn.com
All around the center console

1 Control Display  21 3 Hazard warning system  286

2 Fan  206
Intelligent Safety  139

NFC antenna  43

16
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Cockpit At a glance

4 Glove compartment  225 HDC Hill Descent Control  165

5 Radio
Multimedia Air suspension  200
6 Automatic climate control  203
7 Controller with buttons  22
10 Driving Dynamics Control  110
8 Parking brake  100

Automatic Hold  101

9 PDC Park Distance Control  180

Without Surround View: rearview
camera  184
Surround View  187

cardiagn.com
Cross traffic warning  197
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Parking assistant  193 trol  163
Surround View: Panorama
View  187 11 Steptronic transmission selector
lever  106

17
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance Cockpit

All around the roofliner

cardiagn.com
1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 5 Open rear sliding visor  74
quest  286

2 Glass sunroof  73 Close rear sliding visor  74

3 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ 6 Interior lights  133

senger airbag  138

4 Reading lights  133

18
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Idle state, operating and drive readiness At a glance

Idle state, operating and drive readiness

Vehicle features and options ▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
This chapter describes all standard, country-
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
the selected options or country versions. This WARNING
also applies to safety-related functions and
Unattended children or animals can
systems. The respectively applicable country
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
provisions must be observed when using the
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
respective features and systems.
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
General information

cardiagn.com
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in ▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
one of the three states: ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
▷ Idle state. There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
▷ Operating readiness. leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
▷ Drive readiness. hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀

Idle state Idle state automatic

The idle state is automatically established:
The concept ▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes
The vehicle is switched off in idle state. All place on the vehicle.
electronic systems/power consumers are de‐ ▷ If the charging state of the vehicle batteries
activated. is low.
▷ If one of the front doors is opened, de‐
General information
pending on the setting via iDrive,
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
The idle state is not automatically established
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
while a phone call is active.
Information
Establishing idle state when opening
WARNING the front doors
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into About iDrive:
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against 1. "My Vehicle"
rolling. 2. "Vehicle settings"
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured 3. "Doors/Key"
against rolling away, observe the following: 4. "Turn off after door opening"

19
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance Idle state, operating and drive readiness

Idle state manual Information

Establish idle state in the vehicle after trip end: Some functions, such as DSC, can only be
used in drive readiness state. Observe further
hints regarding drive readiness, refer to
page 97.

Activating drive readiness

Drive readiness is switched on
via the Start/Stop button:

Hold button down until the OFF

indicator on the instrument clus‐ 1. Depress the brake pedal.
ter goes out. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.

cardiagn.com
Display
READY is displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
Operating readiness
The concept
When operating readiness is switched on,
most functions can be used while the vehicle is Switch off drive readiness
stationary. Desired settings can be adjusted. Press the Start/Stop button to switch off the
drive readiness. The vehicle switches into op‐
General information erating readiness state.
The vehicle is in operating readiness state af‐
ter opening via the front doors.

Display
OFF is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and operating read‐
iness switched on.

Drive readiness
The concept
Activating drive readiness corresponds to
switching on the engine.

20
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 iDrive At a glance

iDrive
Vehicle features and options Control elements
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Overview
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

The concept

cardiagn.com
1 Control Display with touchscreen
The iDrive combines the functions of many 2 Controller with buttons and touchpad
switches. These functions can be operated via
controller or touchscreen. Control Display

Information
Information ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the
WARNING care instructions, refer to page 294.
Operating the integrated information ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control
system and communication devices while driv‐ Display; otherwise, the Control Display can
ing can distract from traffic. It is possible to be damaged.
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on
accident. Only use the systems or devices the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐
stop and use the systems and devices while duced down to complete deactivation.
the vehicle is stationary.◀ Once the temperature is reduced, e.g.
through shadow or climate control system,
the normal functions are re-established.

Switching on
1. Turn on operations.
2. Press the controller.

Switch off

1. Press button.

21
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance iDrive

2. "Turn off control display"

Buttons on controller
Controller
Press button Function
General information Press once: call up main menu.
The buttons can be used to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to select Press twice: open recently

cardiagn.com
menu items and enter the settings. used menus.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
Open the Communication
the touchpad on the controller, refer to
menu.
page 26.
▷ Turn. Open the Media/Radio menu.

Open destination input menu

for navigation.

Open navigation map.

Open previous panel.

Open Options menu.

▷ Press.

Operating with the controller

Opening the main menu
Press button.

▷ Move in four directions.

22
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 iDrive At a glance

▷ Move the controller to the right.

New display is opened.

The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Selecting menu items
Highlighted menu items can be selected. Opening recently used menus

cardiagn.com
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu The recently used menus can be displayed.
item is highlighted.
Press button twice.

Opening Options menu

Press button.

The Options menu is displayed.

The Options menu consists of different areas:
▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen".
2. Press the controller. ▷ Control options for the selected main
menu, e.g., for "Media/Radio".
Menu items in the Owner's Manual ▷ If applicable, further operating options for
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be the selected menu, e.g., "Save station".
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g.
"System settings". Changing settings
1. Select a field.
Changing between panels
After a menu item is selected, e.g., "System
settings", a new panel is displayed.
▷ Move the controller to the left.
Closes current display and shows previous
display.

▷ Press button.
The previous display opens.

23
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance iDrive

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting Switching between cases, letters and
is displayed. numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers.
Symbol Function

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Change between capital and

3. Press the controller. lower-case letters.

Activating/deactivating the functions Entry comparison

Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ When entering names and addresses, the
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐

cardiagn.com
choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the tered and letters may be added automatically.
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
Entries are continuously compared with data
tion.
stored in the vehicle.
Function is activated.
▷ Only those letters are offered during input
Function is deactivated. for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: names of locations
Entering letters and numbers may be entered in languages available
through iDrive.
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered using the Using alphabetical lists
controller or the touchscreen.
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
The keyboard's display changes automatically. tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
Entry
1. Turn the controller to the left or right
1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐
quickly.
bers.
All letters for which there are entries are
2. : confirm entry.
displayed on the left side.

Symbol Function 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.

The cursor jumps to the first entry of the
Press the controller: delete the let‐ selected letter.
ter or number.

Hold controller down: delete all let‐

ters and numbers.

24
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 iDrive At a glance

Operating via touchscreen

General information
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
screen.
Touch touchscreen with your fingers. Do not
use any objects.

Opening the main menu

The white arrow indicates that additional pan‐
Tap symbol. els can be called up.
▷ Swipe to the left.
▷ Tap symbol.
New display is opened.

Opening recently used menus

cardiagn.com
Tap symbol twice.

Changing settings
All iDrive functions can be called up via the Settings such as volumes can be changed via
main menu. the touchscreen.
▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
Selecting menu items left, until the desired setting is displayed.
Tap desired menu item. ▷ , Tap symbol.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual Activating/deactivating the functions

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g. box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
"System settings". tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
Changing between panels tion.
After a menu item is selected, a new panel is Function is activated.
displayed. Function is deactivated.

25
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance iDrive

Entering letters and numbers Selecting functions

1. "My Vehicle"
General information
2. "System settings"
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
3. "Touchpad"
controller or the touchscreen.
4. Select desired setting.
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
Symbol Function
▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐
Tapping the symbol: delete the let‐ tive map.
ter or number. ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses.
Tapping the symbol for an extended ▷ "Search fields": write letters without
period: delete all letters or numbers. selecting the list field.
▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
Switching between cases, letters and letters and numbers.
numbers ▷ "Two-finger scrolling": operate lists.

cardiagn.com
Symbol Function Entering letters and numbers
Enter the letters. Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
Enter the numbers. following:
or Change between capital and ▷ The system recognizes capital and lower
lower-case letters. case letters. For the input of upper/lower
case letters and numbers, it may be neces‐
sary to switch to the corresponding input
Operating navigation map mode, e.g. when upper and lower case let‐
The navigation map can be moved with the ters are written the same way. Switching
touchscreen. between cases, numbers and letters, refer
to page 24.
Function Controls
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ the Control Display.
map. gers.
▷ Always enter associated characters, such
Rotate map. Move fingers in a circle. as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐
pends on the set language. Where neces‐
sary, enter special characters via the con‐
Touchpad troller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
General information
the touchpad.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the controller. ▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in
the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.

26
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 iDrive At a glance

▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right 3. Press the controller.

in the lower area of the touchpad.

Using interactive map and Internet

Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the
navigation system and Internet sites.

Function Controls

Move interactive map or Swipe in the ap‐

Internet sites. propriate direc‐
tion.
4. Select desired setting.
Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on
map or Internet sites. the touchpad with Specifying the number of displays
fingers. It is possible to specify the number of displays.
Display the menu or Tap once. 1. Move the controller to the right until the

cardiagn.com
open a link in the Inter‐ split screen is selected.
net. 2. Press the controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
Changing settings
4. Select desired setting.
You may change control display settings via
5. Move the controller to the left.
touchpad. Slide left or right accordingly.

Split screen Status information

Status field
General information
The following information is displayed in the
Additional information can be displayed on the
status field:
right side of the split screen, e.g., information
from the on-board comupter. ▷ Messages.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split ▷ Wireless network reception strength.
screen, this information remains visible even ▷ Current entertainment source.
when you change to another menu. ▷ Time.

Switching the split screen on and off Status field symbols

The symbols are grouped as follows.
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen" Radio symbols

Selecting the display Symbol Meaning

1. Press button. HD Radio station is being received.

2. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.

27
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance iDrive

Telephone symbols Additional symbols

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call. Check Control message.

Missed call. Spoken instructions are turned off.

Wireless network reception Request of the current vehicle posi‐

strength. tion.
Symbol flashes: network search.

Wireless network is not available.

Programmable memory
Roaming is active. buttons
Text message was received.
General information
Message received.
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐

cardiagn.com
Reminder. grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐
Sending not possible. tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Contacts are imported. Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Entertainment symbols
Saving a function
Symbol Meaning 1. Select function via iDrive.

CD/DVD player. 2. Press and hold the desired button

until a signal sounds.
Music collection.

AUX-IN port. Running a function

AUX-IN port in the front or in the Press button.
rear.

Bluetooth audio. The function will work immediately. This

means, e.g., that the number is dialed when a
USB audio interface. phone number is selected.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Displaying the button assignment
Online Entertainment. Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear
WLAN. gloves or use objects.
The key assignment is displayed at top edge of
iPod.
screen.

28
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 iDrive At a glance

Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 7 simultaneously for
approx. five seconds.
2. "OK"

cardiagn.com

29
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance BMW gesture control

BMW gesture control

Vehicle features and options The gestures are captured by a camera in the
roofliner.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐
specific and optional features offered with the
ror.
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and Activation/deactivation
systems. The respectively applicable country About iDrive:
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Gestures"
The concept

cardiagn.com
4. "Gesture control"
Several iDrive functions can be operated using
BMW gesture control.
Adjusting
▷ "Display tips": the possible gesture is
Overview shown on the Control Display.
▷ "Audio feedback": an acoustic signal is
outputted once the gesture is recognized.

30
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 BMW gesture control At a glance

Possible gestures

Gesture Controls Function

Move index finger forward and backward in the direction Accept call.
of the screen. Confirm Check Con‐
trol message.

Swipe with the hand across the width of the Control Dis‐ Reject call.
play in the direction of the front-passenger side. Close popup.

Slowly move forearm in a circular pattern with the index Increasing the vol‐

cardiagn.com
finger stretched out forward. ume.
Gestures are detected after one circular motion.

Slowly move forearm in a circular pattern with the index Reducing the volume.
finger stretched out forward.
Gestures are detected after one circular motion.

Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand hori‐ Surround View: turn
zontally to the right or left. camera view.

Move stretched out index and middle finger forward. Individually assigna‐
ble gesture.

Execute gestures clearly. Assigning gesture individually

The gestures can also be executed on the About iDrive:
front-passenger side.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Gestures"
4. "Function assignment"
5. Select desired setting.

31
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance BMW gesture control

System limits
Gesture recognition by the camera can be dis‐
turbed by the following circumstances:
▷ The camera objective is covered.
▷ The camera objective is contaminated.
Clean the camera lenses, refer to
page 294.
▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐
tection range.
▷ The gesture can only be executed while
the vehicle is stationary.

cardiagn.com

32
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Voice activation system At a glance

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options Using voice activation
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Activating the voice activation system
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
1. Press button on the steering
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
wheel.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Wait for the signal.
systems. The respectively applicable country 3. Say the command.
provisions must be observed when using the A command that is recognized by the voice
respective features and systems. activation system is announced and dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.

The concept This symbol in the instrument cluster

cardiagn.com
indicates that the voice activation sys‐
▷ Most functions displayed on the Control tem is active.
Display can be operated by voice com‐ If no other commands are available, use func‐
mands via the voice activation system. The tion via iDrive.
system supports you with announcements
during input.
▷ Functions that can only be used when the
Terminating the voice activation
vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the
system
voice activation system. Briefly press the button on the steer‐
▷ The system uses a special microphone on ing wheel or ›Cancel‹.
the driver's side.
▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's
Manual to use with the voice activation Possible commands
system.
Most menu items on the Control Display can
be voiced as commands.

Requirements Commends from other menus can also be

spoken.
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
You may select lists such as phone lists via
also supported by the voice activation system
voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐
so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
actly as they show in the respective list.
fied.
Set the language, refer to page 38. Displaying possible commands
Displayed in the top area of the Control Display
are:
▷ Possible commands for the current menu.
▷ Possible commands from other menus.

33
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance Voice activation system

▷ Status of the voice recognition. Selecting the input language

▷ Status of the encrypted connection. For some languages, the input language can
be selected.
Help on the voice activation system About iDrive:
▷ To have the available spoken instructions
1. "My Vehicle"
read out loud: ›Voice commands‹.
2. "System settings"
▷ Have information about the principle of op‐
eration for the voice activation system be 3. "Language"
announced: ›General information on voice 4. "Voice control:"
control‹. 5. Select desired setting.
▷ Announce help for the current
menu: ›Help‹. Activating encrypted connection
By activating an encrypted connection, the
quality of voice recognition will be improved.
One example: open the tone About iDrive:
settings

cardiagn.com
1. "My Vehicle"
The commands of the menu items are spoken
2. "System settings"
just as they are selected via the controller.
3. "Language"
1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if
4. "Speech recognition via server"
needed.
Encrypted connection active.
2. Press button on the steering
wheel.
3. ›Media and radio‹ Adjusting the volume
4. ›Tone‹ Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
Adjusting volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the drive profile
Setting the voice dialog currently used.
Set system to standard dialog or use a short
version.
The short version of the voice dialog plays Information on Emergency
back short messages in abbreviated form. Requests
About iDrive:
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
1. "My Vehicle" tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
2. "System settings"
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
3. "Language" ment of a phone connection.
4. "Speech mode:" Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
5. Select desired setting. page 286, close to the interior mirror.

34
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Voice activation system At a glance

Environmental conditions
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
sis, and speed.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

cardiagn.com

35
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance BMW Touch Command

BMW Touch Command

Vehicle features and options Control elements at a glance

This chapter describes all standard, country- Control elements

specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

BMW Touch Command 1 BMW Touch Command

cardiagn.com
2 Switching on/off
The concept
3 Removing
Important functions of the vehicle can be used
via BMW Touch Command.
Tray
▷ Seat adjustments for front passenger seat
and seats in the rear. The tray in the center armrest in the rear has
the following functions:
▷ Climate control in the rear.
▷ Storage and locking.
▷ Sun protection.
▷ Recharge the battery.
▷ Ambient light.
Insert BMW Touch Command into the tray
▷ Ambient light accent. with the screen facing upward to ensure
▷ Bowers & Wilkins loudspeaker lighting. proper locking. To charge the battery, insert
▷ Audio sources front. BMW Touch Command with the multifunction
socket to the left.
▷ Rear entertainment.
▷ Some functions of the telephone in the Buttons on the BMW Touch Command
rear.
Press but‐ Function
General information ton
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, BMW
Touch Command is located in the rear console Display list of last used applica‐
or in the center armrest in the rear. tions.

Display BMW application, press

button twice as needed.

Back.

36
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 BMW Touch Command At a glance

Operating concept
1. Press button.
The main menu of the BMW application is
displayed.
2. Swipe to the left or right to display further
menus.
3. Tap on the desired menu.
4. Adjust the settings.

Exit the BMW application

Tap on menu item: "Apps"
Further information is displayed.

Language setting

cardiagn.com
The menu language depends on the iDrive set‐
tings.

Setting back to factory settings

BMW Touch Command can be set back to fac‐
tory settings.
All data and personal settings in the device
memory is deleted and the connection to the
vehicle is interrupted.

1. "Settings"
2. "Reset to factory settings"

37
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance General settings

General settings
Vehicle features and options The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the Setting the time
series. It also describes features that are not
About iDrive:
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This 1. "My Vehicle"
also applies to safety-related functions and 2. "System settings"
systems. The respectively applicable country
3. "Date and time"
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems. 4. "Time:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
Language

cardiagn.com
6. Press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐
Setting the language
nutes are displayed.
About iDrive:
8. Press the controller.
1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
2. "System settings" rently used.
3. "Language"
Setting the time format
4. "Language:"
About iDrive:
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
rently used. 2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time"
Setting the voice dialog
4. "Time format:"
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
5. Select desired setting.
refer to page 34.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Time
Instrument cluster with enhanced
Setting the time zone features: setting the clock time
display
About iDrive:
The clock time can be displayed in analog or
1. "My Vehicle" digital form.
2. "System settings" About iDrive:
3. "Date and time"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Time zone:"
2. "System settings"
5. Select desired setting.

38
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 General settings At a glance

3. "Displays" Setting the date format

4. "Instrument panel" About iDrive:
5. "Time" 1. "My Vehicle"
6. Select desired setting. 2. "System settings"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ 3. "Date and time"
rently used.
4. "Date format:"
Automatic time setting 5. Select desired setting.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features, The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are rently used.
updated automatically.
About iDrive:
Units of measurement
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings" Setting the units of measurement

cardiagn.com
3. "Date and time" Set the units for e.g. fuel consumption, routes/
distances and temperature:
4. "Automatic time setting"
About iDrive:
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Units"
Date
4. Select the desired menu item.
Setting the date 5. Select desired setting.
About iDrive: The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Date and time" Control Display
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the controller until the desired day is Brightness
displayed. About iDrive:
6. Press the controller. 1. "My Vehicle"
7. Make the necessary settings for the month 2. "System settings"
and year.
3. "Displays"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
4. "Control display"
rently used.
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set.
7. Press the controller.

39
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance General settings

The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ Deleting messages
rently used. All messages, except Check Control mes‐
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
ness settings may not be clearly visible. Control messages are displayed as long as
they are relevant.
Screen saver About iDrive:
If no settings are made via iDriver, after a time
1. "Notifications"
that can be set, a screen saver is displayed.
2. Select the desired message.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle" 3. Press button.

2. "System settings" 4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
3. "Pop-ups" notifications"
4. "Screensaver"
Adjusting
5. Select desired setting.
The following settings can be adjusted:

cardiagn.com
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐
rently used.
sages will be permitted.
▷ Define the number of new messages per
Messages application, e.g. maximum ten new e-mails.
▷ Sort the messages according to date or
The concept priority.
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐ ▷ Combine several messages of the same
riving in the vehicle in list form. type.
The following messages can be displayed: About iDrive:
▷ Traffic messages. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Check Control messages. 2. "System settings"
▷ Communication messages, e.g. e-mail, 3. "Notifications"
SMS or Twitter.
4. Select desired setting.
▷ Service requirements messages.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field. Deleting personal in the
vehicle
Retrieving messages
About iDrive: The concept
1. "Notifications" Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
2. Select the desired message.
These personal data can be permanently de‐
The respective menu is opened, where the leted through iDrive.
message is displayed.

40
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 General settings At a glance

General information Connections

Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
lowing data can be deleted: The concept
▷ Profile settings. Devices, such as mobile phones or laptops,
▷ Stored radio stations. can be connected to the vehicle in different
ways and used.
▷ Stored Favorites buttons.
▷ Connect mobile phone with the vehicle via
▷ Travel and on-board comupter information.
Bluetooth and use it.
▷ Music collection.
▷ Listen to music of an audio player via Blue‐
▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. tooth.
▷ Phone book. ▷ Play back smartphone videos on the Con‐
▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. trol Display.
▷ Office data, e.g. voice notes. ▷ Use smartphone apps in the vehicle.
▷ Login accounts. ▷ Connect a device using the vehicle-
integrated WLAN hotspot to use the Inter‐

cardiagn.com
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
net.
to 15 minutes.
▷ Use vehicle functions via Touch Com‐
Functional requirement mand, refer to page 36.
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
General information
Deleting data All devices paired and/or connected with the
vehicle are displayed in the device list.
Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
trol Display. About iDrive:
About iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle"
1. Turn on operations. 2. "System settings"
2. "My Vehicle" 3. "Mobile devices"
3. "System settings" A symbol indicates, for which function a device
is used.
4. "Delete personal data"
5. "Delete personal data" Symbol Function
6. "OK" "Telephone"
7. Exit and lock the vehicle.
"Additional telephone"
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐
pleted. "Bluetooth® audio"
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐ "Apps"
letion.
"Miracast"
Canceling deletion "Internet hotspot"
Switch on the drive-ready function to cancel
deletion of the data. "Touch Command"

41
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance General settings

Information Displaying the vehicle identification

WARNING
number and software part number
The vehicle identification number and software
Operating the integrated information
part number are needed to determine which
system and communication devices while driv‐
devices are supported. The software version of
ing can distract from traffic. It is possible to
the mobile phone may also be required.
lose control of the vehicle. There is risk of an
accident. Only use the systems or devices About iDrive:
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary 1. "My Vehicle"
stop and use the systems and devices while
the vehicle is stationary.◀ 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
Compatible devices 4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info"
General information 6. "System information"
Details on which mobile phones and external
A software update, refer to page 46, can be

cardiagn.com
devices with a Bluetooth interface are sup‐
performed, if needed.
ported can be obtained at www.bmwusa.com/
bluetooth.
Bluetooth connection
When pairing a mobile phone as telephone or
additional telephone, it is displayed which fea‐ Functional requirements
tures are supported, e.g. brief messages.
▷ compatible device, refer to page 42.
▷ "Close and do not show again"
▷ The device is ready for operation.
With the next pairing of the mobile phone,
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in
there is no display of which features the
the vehicle, refer to page 42.
mobile phone supports.
▷ Vehicle is stationary.
▷ "OK"
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings may be required on
With the next pairing of the mobile phone,
the device, e.g. visibility, refer to the own‐
there is another display of which features
er's manual of the device.
the mobile phone supports.
▷ A number with at least four and a maximum
It is possible to choose whether there is a dis‐
of 16 digits should be defined as the Blue‐
play when pairing the mobile phone of which
tooth passkey. It is only required once for
features are supported.
pairing.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle" Activating Bluetooth

2. "System settings" About iDrive:

3. "Mobile devices" 1. "My Vehicle"

4. Select device. 2. "System settings"
5. "Hint for Office functions" 3. "Mobile devices"
Malfunctions may occur with other devices or 4. "Settings"
software versions. 5. "Bluetooth®"

42
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 General settings At a glance

Activating/deactivating telephone 6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the sur‐

functions roundings of the device.
To use all supported functions of the mobile The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
phone, the following functions must be acti‐ on the device display. Select the Bluetooth
vated prior to pairing. name of the vehicle.
About iDrive: 7. Enter and confirm the same passkey on
the device and via iDrive.
1. "My Vehicle"
or
2. "System settings"
Compare the control number on the Con‐
3. "Mobile devices"
trol Display with the control number on the
4. "Settings" display of the device. Confirm the control
5. Select desired setting: number on the device and on the Control
▷ "Office" Display.

Activate functions to transmit short 8. The device is connected and displayed in

messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks, the device list.

cardiagn.com
notes, and reminders to the vehicle. There is a display of which features the
Costs can be incurred by transmitting mobile phone supports, refer to page 42.
all data to the vehicle. If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
▷ "Contact images" fer to page 47.
Activate function to show the contact
pictures. Connecting the device via near-field
communication, NFC
6. Move the controller to the left.
With near-field communication, NDC, data can
be transmitted over short distances using radio
Connecting the device via passkey
technology.
entry
Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear Overview
Control Display.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device is
to be used:
▷ "Telephone" The NFC antenna is in the instrument panel
▷ "Bluetooth® audio" below the hazard warning flashers.
▷ "Apps" The device must be unlocked while pairing.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐ compatible devices, refer to page 42.
played on the Control Display.

43
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance General settings

Pairing is also possible while driving. 6. Enter the Bluetooth passkey for the snap-
in adapter at the Control Display.
1. Activate the NFC function on the device,
see the owner's manual of the device 7. "Telephone"

2. Hold the device close to the NFC antenna. 8. The device is connected and displayed in
the device list.
3. Compare the control number on the Con‐
trol Display with the control number on the
WLAN connection
display of the device. Confirm the control
number on the device and on the Control
Functional requirements
Display.
▷ ConnectedDrive contract.
or
▷ Data contract with a service provider.
Confirm the connection on the device.
▷ WLAN-capable device.
4. The device is connected and displayed in
the device list. ▷ WLAN activated on the device.

There is a display of which features the ▷ WLAN hotspot activated in the vehicle.

cardiagn.com
mobile phone supports, refer to page 42. ▷ Vehicle is stationary.
Depending on which functions are already oc‐ ▷ Operating readiness switched on.
cupied, the device is connected with the
phone, additional phone, or music function. Activating WLAN hotspot
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐ About iDrive:
fer to page 47.
1. "My Vehicle"
Pairing the snap-in adapter in the rear 2. "System settings"
with the vehicle 3. "Mobile devices"
▷ The Bluetooth passkey on the back of the 4. "Settings"
snap-in adapter is known. 5. "Internet hotspot"
▷ The snap-in adapter is installed in the cen‐
ter armrest. Connecting device with WLAN
▷ Operating readiness is switched on. hotspot
▷ The SIM card is inserted in the snap-in About iDrive:
adapter or the SIM Access Profile is active. 1. "My Vehicle"
About iDrive: 2. "System settings"
1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Mobile devices"
2. "System settings" 4. "Connect new device"
3. "Mobile devices" 5. "Internet hotspot"
4. "Connect new device" Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
5. Press the button on the snap-in 6. Search for WLAN networks on the device.
adapter for approx. 3 seconds, until the Select network name on the device.
signal tone sounds once.
7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
The LED above the button flashes green. nect.

44
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 General settings At a glance

The device connects to the hotspot via running or the operating readiness is
WLAN. switched on.
With the first Internet usage via the WLAN hot‐ ▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
spot, data volume must be purchased from a mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
service provider. after recognition.
All devices connected via the WLAN hotspot ▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
use this data volume. necessary, e.g. authorization, see owner's
If necessary, data volume can be purchased manual of the device.
from the ConnectedDrive Store. ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
WiFi connection when operating readiness is switched on.
Pair the vehicle entirely on the front or rear
Control Display. Configuring the device
About iDrive: Functions can be activated or deactivated for
paired and connected devices.
1. "My Vehicle"

cardiagn.com
About iDrive:
2. "System settings"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Mobile devices"
2. "System settings"
4. "Connect new device"
3. "Mobile devices"
5. "Miracast"
4. Select the desired device.
The WiFi name of the vehicle is displayed
on the Control Display. 5. Select desired setting.

6. Search for WiFi devices in the surround‐ If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐
ings of the device. tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the de‐
The WiFi name of the vehicle appears on
vice will be disconnected.
the device display. Select the WiFi name of
the vehicle.
Connecting a specific device
7. Compare the control number on the Con‐
About iDrive:
trol Display with the control number on the
display of the device. Confirm the control 1. "My Vehicle"
number on the device and on the Control 2. "System settings"
Display.
3. "Mobile devices"
8. The device is connected and displayed in
4. Select device.
the device list.
5. "Connect device"
If pairing was unsuccessful: What to do if..., re‐
fer to page 47. The functions that were assigned to the device
before unpairing are assigned to the device
Additional functions when it is reconnected. If the device is already
connected, these functions are deactivated.
After initial pairing
▷ The device is connected with the vehicle
Disconnecting the device
within a short period of time if the engine is The connection of the device to the vehicle is
disconnected.

45
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance General settings

The device remains pairs and can be con‐ Updates and related current information are
nected again, refer to page 45. available at www.bmw.com/update.
About iDrive:
Displaying the current version
1. "My Vehicle"
The currently installed software is displayed.
2. "System settings"
About iDrive:
3. "Mobile devices"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. Select device.
2. "System settings"
5. "Disconnect device"
3. "Software update"
Deleting the device 4. "Show current version"
The device is disconnected and removed from If an update has been carried out before, select
the device list. the desired version to display additional infor‐
About iDrive: mation.

1. "My Vehicle" Updating software via USB

cardiagn.com
2. "System settings" The software may only be updated when the
3. "Mobile devices" vehicle is stationary.
4. Select device. About iDrive:
5. "Delete device" 1. Store the file for the software update in the
main directory of a USB flash drive.
Swapping the telephone and 2. Connect the USB data storage to an USB
additional telephone interface, refer to page 221.
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
3. "My Vehicle"
hicle, the functions of phone and additional
phone can be switched. 4. "System settings"

About iDrive: 5. "Software update"

6. "Update software"
1. "My Vehicle"
7. "USB"
2. "System settings"
8. "Install software"
3. "Mobile devices"
9. "OK"
4. "Settings"
10. Await the updating.
5. "Swap telephone 1 and 2"
11. Confirm system restart.
Software Update
Updating software via BMW
General information Teleservices
The vehicle supports various external devices Software update via BMW Teleservices is
depending on the current software version. country-specific and may not be available.
With a software update, compatibility with the The software is first transferred into the vehicle
vehicle can be improved, so that the vehicle and can then be installed. The software can be
can support new mobile phones or new exter‐ installed at a time different from the time of
nal devices, e.g. transfer.

46
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 General settings At a glance

The software can be transferred while driving, 3. "Software update"

and if the journey is interrupted it will resume 4. "Restore software"
automatically the next time the vehicle is
5. ▷ "Previous version"
driven. All other functions remain available dur‐
ing the transfer. Wireless reception must be The previous software version is re‐
available for the transfer to take place. stored.
Installation of the software must only be car‐ ▷ "Default software settings"
ried out while the vehicle is stationary. The first software version is restored.
About iDrive: 6. "Remove software"
1. Turn on operations. or
2. "My Vehicle" "Remove software"
3. "System settings" 7. "OK"
4. "Software update" 8. Wait for restore.
5. "Update software" 9. Confirm system restart.

cardiagn.com
6. "TeleService"
What to do if...
7. "Load update"
Information on compatible mobile phones, re‐
The update is loaded, however not instal‐ fer to page 42.
led.
The mobile phone could not be paired or con‐
8. ▷ "Install software" nected.
The loaded update is installed. ▷ Is Bluetooth activated in the vehicle and on
This step can be carried out at a later the mobile phone? Activate Bluetooth in
point in time. the vehicle and on the mobile phone.
▷ If the update should not be installed, it ▷ Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
can be removed again. phone and the vehicle match? Enter the
"Remove update" same passkey on the mobile phone and via
iDrive.
The following steps are omitted.
▷ Did it take longer than 30 seconds to enter
9. "OK"
the passkey? Repeat pairing.
10. Await the updating.
▷ Is NFC activated on the mobile phone? Ac‐
11. Confirm system restart. tivate NFC on the mobile phone.
▷ Is distance from mobile phone to near-field
Restoring the software version communication antenna too far? Hold mo‐
The software version before the last software bile phone directly to the antenna in the in‐
update or the version before the first software strument cluster.
update can be restored.
▷ Do the control numbers on the mobile
The software may only be restored when the phone and vehicle match? Repeat the pair‐
vehicle is stationary. ing procedure.
About iDrive: ▷ Are too many Bluetooth devices con‐
1. "My Vehicle" nected to the mobile phone or vehicle? De‐
lete connections with other devices if
2. "System settings" needed.

47
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance General settings

▷ Is Bluetooth audio activated? Deactivate connect it with the telephone or auxiliary

Bluetooth audio. phone function.
▷ Delete all known Bluetooth connections The phone connection quality is poor.
from the device list on the mobile phone ▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the
prior to pairing. Start new device search. mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
▷ Is the mobile phone in power-save mode or on the mobile phone.
does it have only a limited remaining bat‐ ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
tery life? Charge the mobile phone in the adapter or place it in the area of the center
snap-in adapter, wireless charging storage console.
or via the charging cable.
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless
▷ Depending on the mobile phone, it is pos‐ charging tray.
sible that only one mobile phone can be
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and
connected to the vehicle. Unpair the con‐
loudspeakers separately.
nected mobile phone from the vehicle and
pair and connect only one mobile phone. If all points in this list have been checked and
the required function is still not available, con‐
The mobile phone no longer reacts.

cardiagn.com
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
▷ Switch the mobile phone off and on again. other qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ Ambient temperatures too high or too low?
Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
treme ambient temperatures.
The telephone functions are not available.
▷ Configure the mobile phone and connect it
with the telephone or auxiliary phone func‐
tion.
No or not all phone book entries are displayed,
or they are incomplete.
▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
are transmitted.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
stored is too high.
▷ Is the data volume of the contact too large,
e.g., due to stored information such as
notes? Reduce the data volume of the con‐
tact.
▷ Is the mobile phone connected as an audio
source? Configure the mobile phone and

48
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Keyword search
Search for information and descriptions by en‐
This chapter describes all standard, country-
tering terms selected from the index.
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
Videos
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This The basic functions of selected systems are
also applies to safety-related functions and explained in the videos.
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the Select components
respective features and systems.
1. Press button.
2. "My Vehicle"
Integrated Owner's Manual

cardiagn.com
3. "Owner's Manual"
in the vehicle 4. Select desired setting.

The concept Scrolling through the owner's manual

The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ Turn controller, until the next or previous con‐
played on the Control Display. It specifically tents are displayed.
describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. Context help - Owner's Manual to the
temporarily selected function
Components of the Integrated
You may open the relevant information di‐
Owner's Manual
rectly.
The Integrated owner's manual consists of
four parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ Opening via the iDrive
mation or possible access.
To move directly from the application on the
Control Display to the Options menu:
Quick Reference Guide
The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
1. Press button.
tion how to operate the car, how to use basic
vehicle functions or what to do in case of a 2. "Owner's Manual"
breakdown. This information can also be dis‐
played while driving. Opening when a Check Control
message is displayed
Search by images Directly from the Check Control message on
Image search provides information and de‐ the Control Display:
scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ "Owner's Manual"
ogy for a feature is not at hand.

49
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, e. g., radio, to the
Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to
alternate between the two displays:

1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.

4. Press button again to return to last

displayed function.

5. Press button to return to the page of

cardiagn.com
the Owner's Manual displayed last.
To alternate permanently between the last dis‐
played function and the Owner's Manual re‐
peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every
time.

Programmable memory buttons

General information
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
stored on the Programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 28, and called up directly.

Storing
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
▷ "Quick reference"
▷ "Search by pictures"
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Animations"

2. Press desired button and hold for

more than 2 seconds.

Executing
Press the corresponding button.
The owner's manual is directly dis‐
played via the selected entry point.

50
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

cardiagn.com

51
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 cardiagn.com

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information that will give you complete control of

cardiagn.com
your vehicle. All features and accessories that
are useful for driving and your safety, comfort
and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Controls Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Overview

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
Remote control/key

cardiagn.com
3 Opening the trunk lid

General information 4 Panic mode

The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐
trols with integrated key. Integrated key
Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐
tery.
You may set the key functions depending on
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
sion. For Settings, refer to page 67.
The vehicle stores personal settings for every
remote control. Profile, refer to page 58.
The remote controls hold information on re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 279. Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐
row 2.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
▷ Driver's door.
▷ Glove compartment.

The glove compartment contains a switch for

separately securing the trunk lid, refer to
page 65.

54
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

Replacing the battery ▷ Interference from radio transmissions

through mobile devices in close proximity
to remote control.
▷ Interference of radio transmission by
charger while charging items such as mo‐
bile devices in the vehicle.
A Check Control message is displayed when
an attempt is made to start the engine or acti‐
vate engine readiness.

1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐ Activation of drive-ready state via
trol. emergency detection of the remote
control
2. Raise the cover of the battery compart‐
ment, arrow 1.
3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐

cardiagn.com
ment, arrow 2.
4. Insert a battery of the same type with the
positive side facing up.
5. Press the cover closed.
Take old battery to a collection point, a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. If a respective Check Control message ap‐
pears, hold the remote control with its back
against the marked area on the steering col‐
New remote controls
umn. The tailgate button on the remote control
New remote controls are available from a should be at the same height as the marked
dealer’s service center or another qualified area. Press the Start/Stop button within
service center or repair shop. 10 seconds while pressing the brake pedal.
If the remote control is not recognized: slightly
Loss of the remote controls
change the height position of the remote con‐
The lost remote control can be blocked by a trol and repeat the procedure.
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.

Emergency detection of remote BMW display key

control
Engine readiness can also be activated in the
General information
following situations: Instead of a standard remote control, the vehi‐
cle is equipped with the BMW display key with
▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐
an additional mechanical key. If the BMW dis‐
mote control by external sources e.g., by
play key is used, the mechanical key should be
radio masts.
carried along, e.g. in the wallet.
▷ Empty battery in remote control.

55
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

The BMW display key supports all functions of Reception area

the standard remote control. Beyond that, the The number of available remote control func‐
following functions are available. tions depends on the distance from the vehi‐
▷ Display status of doors and windows. cle.
▷ Display status of the alarm system. ▷ When you are in close proximity to the ve‐
▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked- hicle, all functions are available.
car heating. ▷ The status information can be called up in
Without parked-car heating: operate the extended reception area.
parked-car ventilation. With parked-car heating: the parked-car
▷ Call up range with available fuel. heating can be operated.

▷ Display service information. Without parked-car heating: the parked-car

ventilation can be operated.
Emergency detection of the BMW ▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehi‐
display key cle, you can only display the last transmit‐
The description for the emergency detection ted status information from the vehicle.

cardiagn.com
of the remote control, refer to page 55, also The symbol is shown on the display if one
applies for the BMW display key. However, the of the buttons is pressed outside of the recep‐
locking button should be at the height of the tion range.
marking.
Display
Overview
Setup
The display is divided into the upper status
line, the information area and the lower status
line.
The upper status line displays the following in‐
formation:
▷ Vehicle secured.
Vehicle not secured.
▷ Set time in the vehicle.
1 Opening the trunk lid
▷ Charge state of the battery in the re‐
2 Unlocking
mote control.
3 Panic mode
The information area can be used to access in‐
4 Locking formation and perform additional functions.
5 Display The lower status line indicates whether or not
6 Back the remote control is within reception range,
7 Switching the display on/off refer to page 56.

8 Micro-USB charging port ▷ "Connected": Remote control is in the re‐

ception range.
▷ "Updated": Remote control is outside of
the reception range. It indicates when the

56
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

last data transfer from the vehicle took The following overview shows, using which
place. main menus the information and functions can
be accessed.
Controls
Menu Information/Function
If the information area contains more than one
page, then page indicators are shown beneath "Security /
the information. information" Door status
The indicator for the current page has Alarm system status
been filled in.
After alarm triggering: date,
Swipe to the right or left with a finger to time, and reason for trigger‐
change between the pages. ing the alarm
If additional information is available on a page,
tap the appropriate symbol.
Window status
Touch the arrow symbol beneath the dis‐
play to return to the original page. Glass sunroof status

cardiagn.com
"Vehicle Maintenance indicators of
Switching the display on/off information" Condition Based Service
The display will go out automatically after a CBS, refer to page 279
brief period to conserve battery power. Status of the roadside park‐
To hide the display manually, press the button ing lamp
on the left side of the remote control. Over‐
view, refer to page 56. "MOBILITY Range with available fuel
INFO"
Show the display:
"Climate With parked-car heating: op‐
1. Press button on the left side of the remote
control erate parked-car heating, re‐
control.
setting" fer to page 209.
2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom
Without parked-car heating:
to top to unlock the screen lock.
operate parked-car ventila‐
Completely switch off the display to increase tion, refer to page 209.
the usable battery life.

1. Press and hold the button on the left side Charging the remote control battery
of the remote control for longer than 4 sec‐ If the charge state of the remote control bat‐
onds. tery declines, the display is switched off auto‐
2. "OK" tap. matically. The battery must be recharged be‐
Press button on the left side of the remote fore the display can be switched back on. The
control to switch on the switched-off display. operability of the standard buttons is retained
until the battery is completely run down.
Operating concept To charge the remote control battery:
Depending on the equipment, there are up to
five main menus that provide access to the
sub-menus.

57
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

during unlocking. These settings are also re‐

stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
meantime by a person with a different remote
control.
Changes to the settings are automatically
saved in the profile currently activated.
If another profile is selected via iDrive, the set‐
tings saved in it will be applied automatically.
The new profile is assigned to the remote con‐
▷ Place remote control with the lock button trol currently used.
upward in the bulge of the wireless charg‐
There is an additional profile available that is
ing station underneath the center armrest.
not assigned to any remote control: "Just drive
▷ Connect the remote control via the micro off (guest)". It can be used to apply settings in
USB socket on the left side to a USB port. the vehicle without changing the personal pro‐
files.
Software information

cardiagn.com
To display information stored in the BMW dis‐ Active profile
play key about the OpenSource software used, After switching on the Control Display, the
proceed as follows: name of the active profile is displayed.
1. Menu "Security information" It is possible to jump directly to the Profile
2. , Tap symbol. management, refer to page 59, in order to
select your own profile, for example. This allow
3. / Tap the symbol three times.
you to call up personal vehicle settings if you
To end the display: did not unlock the vehicle with your own key.
Tap symbol.
1. "Change driver profile"
2. Select profile, refer to page 59.
Profile As soon as the engine is started or any key is
pressed, the last selected key is displayed on
The concept the Control Display.
In the profiles, individual settings for several To exit the welcome screen via iDrive:
drivers can be saved and called up again at a "Start system"
later time.
Adjusting
General information The settings for the following systems and
There are three profiles with which personal functions are saved in the active profile. The
vehicle settings can be stored. Every remote scope of storable settings is country- and
control has one of these profiles assigned. equipment-dependable.
If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ ▷ Unlocking and locking.
trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐
▷ Lights.
vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐
tomatically applied. ▷ Climate control.

If several drivers use their own remote control, ▷ Radio.

the vehicle will adjust the personal settings

58
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

▷ Instrument cluster. Guest profile

▷ Programmable memory buttons. The guest profile is for individual settings that
▷ Volumes, tone. are stored in none of the three personal pro‐
files.
▷ Control Display.
This can be useful for drivers who are using
▷ Navigation.
the vehicle temporarily and do not have their
▷ TV. own profile.
▷ Park Distance Control PDC. About iDrive:
▷ Rearview camera
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Side View.
2. "Driver profiles"
▷ Head-up Display.
3. "Just drive off (guest)"
▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
4. "OK"
▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position,
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not
steering wheel position.
assigned to the current remote control.

cardiagn.com
▷ Cruise control.
▷ Intelligent Safety. Rename profile
▷ Night vision. A personal name can be assigned to the active
profile to avoid confusion between the profiles.
Profile management About iDrive:

Selecting a profile 1. "My Vehicle"

Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ 2. "Driver profiles"

ferent profile may be activated. The profile marked with this symbol can
About iDrive: be renamed.
3. Select profile.
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Change driver profile name"
2. "Driver profiles"
5. Enter profile name.
3. Select profile.
6. Select the symbol.
4. "OK"
▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile Resetting the profile
are automatically applied.
The settings of the active profile are reset to
▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ their default values.
mote control being used at the time.
About iDrive:
▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐
ent remote control, this profile will apply to 1. "My Vehicle"
both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐ 2. "Driver profiles"
tiated anymore between the settings for The profile marked with this symbol can
the two remote controls. be reset.
3. Select profile.
4. "Reset driver profile"

59
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

Exporting profiles Using the remote control

Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐
ported. Information
This can be helpful for securing and retrieving WARNING
personal settings, before delivering the vehicle
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
to a workshop, e.g. The profiles backed up can
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
be taken into another vehicle.
in. The vehicle can then not be opened from
The following export options are available: the outside. There is risk of injuries. Take the
▷ Via ConnectedDrive. remote control along so that the vehicle can be
opened from the outside.◀
▷ Via USB interface, refer to page 221, to a
USB device.
About iDrive: Unlocking
Press button on the remote control.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Driver profiles"
Depending on the settings, refer to page 67,

cardiagn.com
The profile marked with this symbol can the following access points are unlocked:
be exported.
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
3. Select profile.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap.
4. "Export driver profile"
In addition, the following functions are exe‐
5. ▷ USB device: "USB device" cuted:
Select USB device as needed. ▷ The settings saved in the profile, refer to
▷ ConnectedDrive. page 58, are applied.
▷ The interior lights are being switched on,
Importing profiles unless they were manually switched off.
The existing settings of the active profile are Switching the interior lights on and off
overwritten with the settings of the imported manually, refer to page 133.
profile. ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if it is
About iDrive: dark outside, door handle lighting and the
Welcome Light Carpet are also switched
1. "My Vehicle" on. These functions must be activated in
2. "Driver profiles" the Settings, refer to page 130.
The profile marked with this symbol can Press the remote control button again to
be overwritten. switch on Welcome Light Carpet for the al‐
3. Select profile. ready unlocked vehicle.
4. "Import driver profile" ▷ The rear sliding visor is traveled into the
position, where it was prior to locking.
5. Select the medium using which the profile
was exported. ▷ Anti-theft protection is switched off.
▷ USB device: "USB device" ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 69, is
disarmed.
Select USB device as needed.
After opening the driver's door, the vehicle is
▷ ConnectedDrive.
ready for operation, refer to page 20.
6. Select profile.

60
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

Convenient opening If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐

onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐
Press and hold this button on the re‐
tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti-
mote control after unlocking.
theft warning system, refer to page 70, are
The windows and the glass sunroof are turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐
opened, as long as the button on the remote fore pressing the button again.
control is pressed.
Panic mode
Locking You can trigger the alarm system if you find
WARNING yourself in a dangerous situation.

For some country-specific variants, un‐ Press button on the remote control
locking from the inside is only possible with and hold for at least 3 seconds.
special knowledge.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is Opening the tailgate

cardiagn.com
risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people CAUTION
in it.◀ During opening, the trunk lid pivots back
and up. There is risk of property damage. Make
The driver's door must be closed.
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
Press button on the remote control. is clear during opening and closing.◀

Press and hold button on the remote

▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
control for approx. one second.
are locked.
▷ The rear sliding visor is being closed. The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether the
▷ Anti-theft protection is switched on. It pre‐ vehicle was previously locked or unlocked.
vents the doors from being unlocked using To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
the lock buttons or the door opener. place the remote control in the cargo area.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 69, is Depending on the features and the country
armed. version, it is also possible to have door un‐
locked. Create the settings, refer to page 67.
Switching on exterior lighting If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is
Press button on the remote control with locked again as soon as it closes.
the vehicle locked.
Switching on the headlight courtesy
▷ The interior lights are being switched on, delay feature
unless they were manually switched off.
Press button on the remote control.
Switching the interior lights on and off
manually, refer to page 133.
The duration can be set in the Control Display.
▷ In the dark, door handle lighting and Wel‐
come Light Carpet are switched on if these
functions were activated. For Settings, re‐
fer to page 67.

61
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

Malfunction Any unauthorized modifications or changes to

Remote control detection by the vehicle can these devices could void the user's authority to
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ operate this equipment.
lowing circumstances:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replace the battery, refer to Without remote control
page 55.
From the outside
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment WARNING
with high transmit power. For some country-specific variants, un‐
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to locking from the inside is only possible with
metal objects. special knowledge.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from If people must spend a longer time in the vehi‐
mobile phones or other electronic devices cle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is
in direct proximity. risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the
vehicle from the outside when there are people

cardiagn.com
Do not transport the remote control together
in it.◀
with metal objects or electronic devices.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also CAUTION
be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐ The door lock is permanently joined with
out remote control, refer to page 62. the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
For US owners only integrated key inserted, paint or key can be
The transmitter and receiver units comply with damaged. There is risk of property damage.
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Remove the integrated key before pulling the
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ outside door handle.◀
erned by the following:
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
FCC ID: one hand.
▷ LX8766S.
▷ LX8766E.
▷ LX8CAS.
▷ LX8CAS2.
▷ MYTCAS4.
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

62
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

2. Guide one finger of the other hand from the From the inside
back under the lid, push the palpable re‐
lease outward and remove the lid. Unlocking and locking

3. Unlock or lock the door lock using the Via the buttons for the central locking system.
integrated key, refer to page 54.
▷ Pressing the button unlocks the
vehicle.

cardiagn.com
▷ Pressing the button locks the ve‐
hicle if the front doors are closed.
The vehicle is not secured against theft
when locking.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
The other doors must be unlocked or locked system and interior lights come on.
from the inside.
Unlocking and opening
Alarm system ▷ Press the central locking system
The alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is button to unlock the doors to‐
locked with the integrated key. gether, and then pull the door handle
The alarm system is triggered when the door is above the armrest.
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the
door lock.
In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle
Doors
with the remote control, if needed, through
emergency detection of the remote control, re‐
Automatic Soft Closing
fer to page 55. To close the doors, push lightly.
It is closed automatically.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on operating
the doors. There is risk of injuries. Make sure
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during opening and closing.◀

63
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

Trunk lid
Information
To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
place the remote control in the cargo area.

Opening
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available
▷ Press button on the inside of the trunk lid.
before opening.
The trunk lid closes automatically.

With Comfort Access:

cardiagn.com
▷ Press button on the exterior of the trunk
lid.

▷ Press and hold button on the re‐ ▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
mote control for approx. one sec‐ trunk lid.
ond. ▷ Press button, arrow 2.
As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ The vehicle will be locked after closing the
locked. Opening with the remote control, tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
refer to page 61. for this purpose and the remote control
▷ Press button in the storage com‐ must be outside of the vehicle in the area
partment of the driver's door. of the trunk lid.
The opening procedure is interrupted: An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate
▷ By pressing the button again. closes.
▷ When starting the engine. The closing operation is interrupted:
▷ When the vehicle starts moving. ▷ By pressing the button again.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the ▷ When starting the engine.
tailgate. ▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks.

Closing WARNING

Without Comfort Access: Body parts can be jammed when operat‐

ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
is clear during opening and closing.◀

64
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

Manual operation Comfort Access

In the event of an electrical malfunction, man‐
ually operate the unlocked trunk lid slowly and Information
smoothly. To avoid locking it into the vehicle, do not
WARNING place the remote control in the cargo area.
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
The concept
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
is clear during opening and closing.◀ ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
Locking separately trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The trunk lid can be locked separately with the The vehicle automatically detects the remote
switch in the glove compartment. If the glove control when it is in close proximity or in the
compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be car's interior.
opened. Comfort Access supports the following func‐

cardiagn.com
tions:
▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1.
▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle.
▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐
row 2. ▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Opening/closing the tailgate individually.
▷ Open/close trunk lid with no-touch activa‐
Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This
tion.
secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from
the central locking system. ▷ Start the engine.

This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked

Functional requirements
using valet service. The remote control can be
handed out without the integrated key. ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐
ence nearby.
Emergency unlocking ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
the doors.
▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐
mote control is in the vehicle.

Pull the handle inside the trunk.

The trunk lid unlocks.

65
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

Unlocking

Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a

closed vehicle door, arrow, with your finger and
Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely,
hold it there without grasping the door handle.
arrow.
This corresponds to pressing and holding
This corresponds to pressing the remote
the remote control button.
control button.
In addition to locking, the windows and the

cardiagn.com
Locking glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
The driver's door must be closed.
Opening the tailgate individually
Press button on the exterior of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the re‐
mote control button.
The situation of the doors does not change.

Opening and closing the trunk lid with

no-touch activation
Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a
The concept
closed vehicle door, arrow, with your finger for
approx. one second without grasping the door The trunk lid can be opened and closed with
handle. no-touch activation using the remote control
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐
This corresponds to pressing the remote
ward-directed foot motion in the center of the
control button.
area at the rear of the car and the tailgate
opens and closes.
Convenient closing
WARNING
Information
With convenient closing, body parts can WARNING
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. Make sure During no-contact activation, vehicle
that the area of movement of the doors is clear parts may be touched, e.g. hot exhaust sys‐
during convenient closing.◀ tem. There is risk of injuries. With the foot mo‐
tion, make sure there is steady stance and do
not touch the vehicle.◀

66
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

If the remote control is in the sensor area, the The closing of the trunk lid has no effect on the
tailgate can be closed or opened inadvertently locking of the vehicle. To avoid locking it into
by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot the vehicle, do not place the remote control in
movement. the cargo area.
The sensor range reaches approx. 5 ft/1.50 m Another foot movement can interrupt the clos‐
behind the area at the rear of the car. ing operation.
WARNING
Malfunction
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
Remote control detection by the vehicle can
ing the tailgate. There is risk of injuries. Make
among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
lowing circumstances:
is clear during opening and closing.◀
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
CAUTION charged. Replace the battery, refer to
During opening, the trunk lid pivots back page 55.
and up. There is risk of property damage. Make ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate transmission towers or other equipment

cardiagn.com
is clear during opening and closing.◀ with high transmit power.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to
Foot movement to be carried out metal objects.
1. Place in the center behind the vehicle, ▷ Interference of the radio connection from
about an arm's length from the vehicle rear. mobile phones or other electronic devices
2. Move a foot in the direction of travel as far in direct proximity.
under the vehicle as possible and immedi‐ Do not transport the remote control together
ately pull it back. With this movement, the with metal objects or electronic devices.
leg must pass through the ranges of both In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
sensors. the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to
page 62.

Adjusting
General information
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether it
was previously locked or unlocked. Unlocking
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
tem flashes. Doors
To close the tailgate, repeat the foot move‐ About iDrive:
ment. 1. "My Vehicle"
Before closing, the hazard warning system 2. "Vehicle settings"
flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.

67
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

3. "Doors/Key" ▷ "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"

4. "Driver's door"
Automatic locking
or
About iDrive:
"All doors"
5. Select desired setting: 1. "My Vehicle"

▷ "Driver's door" 2. "Vehicle settings"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler 3. "Doors/Key"

flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ 4. Select desired setting:
locks the entire vehicle. ▷ "Lock automatically"
▷ "All doors" The vehicle locks automatically after a
The entire vehicle is unlocked. short period of time if no door is
opened.
Trunk lid ▷ "Lock after starting to drive"
Depending on optional features and country The vehicle locks automatically after

cardiagn.com
version, this setting is not offered in some you drive off.
cases.
About iDrive: Automatic unlocking
1. "My Vehicle" About iDrive:

2. "Vehicle settings" 1. "My Vehicle"

3. "Doors/Key" 2. "Vehicle settings"
4. "Tailgate" 3. "Doors/Key"
or 4. "Unlock at end of trip"
"Tailgate and door(s)" After drive readiness is ended by pressing
5. Select desired setting: the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is
automatically unlocked.
▷ "Tailgate"
The trunk lid is opened. Retrieving the seat, mirror, and
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" steering wheel settings
The trunk lid is opened and the doors On unlocking of the vehicle, the positions for
are unlocked. the driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering
wheel stored in the profile are automatically re‐
Confirmation signals from the vehicle trieved.
About iDrive: WARNING
1. "My Vehicle" There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
2. "Vehicle settings"
property damage. Make sure that the area of
3. "Doors/Key" movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ justment.◀
mation signals.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock"

68
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

About iDrive: Trunk lid and armed alarm system

1. "My Vehicle" The trunk lid can be opened even when the
alarm system is armed.
2. "Driver profiles"
After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and
3. Select profile.
monitored again when the doors are locked.
4. "Last seat position automatic" The hazard warning system flashes once.
The adjustment procedure is interrupted:
▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. Panic mode
▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and You can trigger the alarm system if you find
steering wheel memory is pressed briefly. yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press button on the remote control
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Alarm system
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The concept
Indicator lamp on the interior rearview

cardiagn.com
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
mirror
system responds to:
▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid.
▷ Movements in the interior.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing
the car.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system briefly signals tampering:
▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every
▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ 2 seconds:
tem.
The alarm system is armed.
▷ By flashing the high beams.
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
Arming and disarming the alarm Doors, hood or tailgate are not correctly
system closed. Correctly closed access points are
secured.
When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either
with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp
cess, the alarm system is disarmed or armed at flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐
the same time. sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active.
When the still open access is closed, inte‐
Door lock and armed alarm system rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will
The alarm system is triggered when the door is be switched on.
opened, when the vehicle is unlocked via the ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐
door lock. ing:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.

69
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking ▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying
until drive readiness is switched on, but no the remote control on your person, grasp
longer than approx. 5 minutes: the driver side or front passenger side door
An alarm has been triggered. handle completely.

Tilt alarm sensor Power windows

The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations such Information
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is WARNING
towed.
Unattended children or animals can
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
Interior motion sensor
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
The windows and glass sunroof must be
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
closed for the system to function properly.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.

cardiagn.com
Avoiding unintentional alarms ▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ ▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
sor can be switched off together, such as in
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
the following situations:
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
▷ In automatic car washes.
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
▷ In duplex garages. hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ and lock the vehicle.◀
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
▷ With animals in the vehicle.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor
Press the remote control button again
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
onds and then continues to flash.
Opening
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are turned off until the vehicle is locked ▷ Press the button to the resistance
again. point.
The window opens while the switch is held.
Switching off the alarm ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐
ance point.
▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐
trol, if needed, through emergency detec‐ The window opens automatically. Pressing
tion of the remote control, refer to page 55. the switch again stops the motion.
See also: Convenient opening, refer to
page 61, via remote control.

70
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

Closing that the area of movement of the windows is

clear during opening and closing.◀
WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts In case of danger from the outside or if ice
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐ might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure lows:
that the area of movement of the windows is 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point
clear during opening and closing.◀ and hold it there.
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance The pinch protection is limited and the
point. window reopens slightly if the closing force
The window closes while the switch is exceeds a certain margin.
held. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
point. there.
The window closes automatically. Pulling The window closes without jam protection.
again stops the motion.

cardiagn.com
See also: closing by means of Comfort Access,
Safety switch
refer to page 65.
The concept
Pinch protection system With the safety switch for the rear, it is possible
to block particular functions. This makes
WARNING sense, for example, if children or animals are
When operating the windows, body parts carried in the rear.
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure General information
that the area of movement of the windows is The following functions can be locked using
clear during opening and closing.◀ the switch:
WARNING ▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows
Accessories on the windows such as an‐ using the switches in the rear.
tennas can impact jam protection. There is risk ▷ Operation of the roller sunblind in the rear
of injuries. Do not install accessories in the window using the switches in the rear.
area of movement of the windows.◀ ▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds in the side
If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a windows using the switches in the rear.
window closes, closing is interrupted. ▷ Adjustment of the power rear seats.
The window reopens slightly. ▷ Operation of the rear sliding visor using the
switches in the rear.
Closing without the pinch protection
system Information
WARNING WARNING
When operating the windows, body parts When operating the windows, body parts
and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐ and objects can be jammed. There is risk of in‐
juries or risk of property damage. Make sure juries or risk of property damage. Make sure

71
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

that the area of movement of the windows is Roller sunblind in the rear window
clear during opening and closing.◀
Overview
In order to prevent uncontrolled closing of the
windows, press the safety switch, e.g. if chil‐
Driver's door
dren or animals are carried in the rear.

Switching on and off

Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.

Roller sunblinds
Button for the roller sunblind in the
General information rear window.

cardiagn.com
The safety switch, refer to page 71, in the driv‐
er's door can be used to prevent children, e.g., Rear doors
from operating the roller sunblinds using the
switches in the rear.

BMW Touch Command

The roller sunblinds can also be operated us‐
ing BMW Touch Command.

Information
If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐
blinds after having activated them consecu‐
tively a number of times, the system is blocked Button for the roller sunblind in the
for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let rear window.
the system cool.
The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low Controls
interior temperatures.
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open
roller sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.
Hold the button down to operate the roller sun‐
blinds on the rear window and on the side win‐
dows at the same time.

72
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

Roller sunblinds in the side windows WARNING

Unattended children or animals can
Overview move the vehicle and endanger themselves
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
Buttons for the roller sunblinds in the hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
side windows. and lock the vehicle.◀

Overview

cardiagn.com
Controls
Press the button to open the closed
roller sunblind or to close the open
roller sunblind.
If the button is pressed again during the move‐
ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐
site direction.

Glass sunroof 1 Open/close the glass sunroof/sliding visor.

With panoramic glass sunroof: open/close
General information
glass sunroof/front sliding visor.
The glass sunroof and the front sliding visor
2 With panoramic glass sunroof: close rear
can be operated together or separately using
sliding visor.
the same switch. The rear sliding visor is oper‐
ated using separate buttons. 3 With panoramic glass sunroof: open rear
sliding visor.
The glass sunroof is operational when the
standby state is switched on.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Information Push switch briefly upward.
WARNING ▷ The closed glass sunroof is
Body parts can be jammed on operating tilted and the sliding visor
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. opens slightly.
Make sure that the area of movement of the ▷ The opened glass sunroof
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐ closes until it is in its tilted
ing.◀ position. The sliding visor
does not move.

73
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Opening and closing

▷ The tilted glass sunroof is being closed. Comfort position

If the glass sunroof is not automatically com‐
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and pletely opened, the comfort position has been
front sliding visor separately attained. In this position the wind noises in the
interior are the least.
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐ If desired, continue the movement by Pressing
ance point and hold it there. the switch.

The sliding visor opens, as

Opening/closing the rear sliding visor
long as the switch is held
down. If the sliding visor is
On the roofliner control panel
already fully open, the glass
sunroof opens. Press button to open the rear sliding
visor.
The glass sunroof closes as
long as the switch is held Press button again to stop the movement.
down. If the glass sunroof is

cardiagn.com
already closed or in the tilted Press button to close the sliding visor.
position, the sliding visor Press button again to stop the move‐
closes. ment.
▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point. On the control panel in the rear doors
The sliding visor opens automatically. If the The rear sliding visor cannot be used via the
sliding visor is already fully open, the glass buttons in the rear if the safety function, refer
sunroof opens automatically. to page 71, is switched on.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If Press the button to open the closed
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the sliding visor or to close the open slid‐
tilted position, the sliding visor closes au‐ ing visor.
tomatically.
Press button again to stop the movement.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion. When the button is pressed again, the sliding
visor will move in the opposite direction.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and

front sliding visor together BMW Touch Command
The rear sliding visor can also be operated us‐
Briefly press the switch twice in
ing BMW Touch Command.
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
Actions during unlocking/locking
The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐
If the vehicle is locked from the outside, the
sor move together. Pressing the
rear sliding visor is automatically closed.
switch upward stops the motion.
During unlocking, the sliding visor is automati‐
▷ See also: Convenient opening, refer to cally traveled into the position, where it was
page 61, via remote control. prior to locking.
▷ See also: closing by means of Comfort Ac‐
cess, refer to page 65.

74
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Opening and closing Controls

Pinch protection system Initializing the system

If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ The system can be initialized when the vehicle
roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ is stationary and the engine is running.
ment is stopped, beginning at approximately During the initialization, the glass sunroof
the middle of the opening in the roof, or from closes without jam protection.
the tilted position during closing.
WARNING
The glass sunroof reopens slightly.
Body parts can be jammed on operating
WARNING the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries.
Body parts can be jammed on operating Make sure that the area of movement of the
the glass sunroof. There is risk of injuries. glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
Make sure that the area of movement of the ing.◀
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐
ing.◀ Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Closing from the open position

cardiagn.com
without pinch protection ▷ Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is com‐
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐
pleted when the glass sun‐
lows:
roof and sliding visor are
1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐ completely closed.
sistance point and hold. ▷ The glass sunroof closes without jam pro‐
The pinch protection is limited and the tection.
glass sunroof reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain margin.
2. Press the switch forward again beyond the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.

Closing from the raised position

without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, push the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes without jam protec‐
tion.

Initializing after a power failure

After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
operated to a limited extent.

75
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

Adjusting
Vehicle features and options backrest in an as upright position as possible
and do not adjust again while driving.◀
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the WARNING
series. It also describes features that are not There is risk of jamming when moving
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
the selected options or country versions. This property damage. Make sure that the area of
also applies to safety-related functions and movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
systems. The respectively applicable country justment.◀
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Electrically adjustable seats

Overview
Sitting safely

cardiagn.com
The ideal seating position can make a vital
contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
The seating position plays an important role in
an accident in combination with:
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 80.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 82.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 136.

1 Thigh support

Front seats 2 Forward/back, height, tilt

3 Shoulder support
Information 4 Backrest width
WARNING 5 Lumbar support
Seat adjustments while driving can lead 6 Backrest, head restraint
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is risk of an acci‐
General information
dent. Only adjust the side on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀ The seat adjustment for the driver's seat is
stored for the profile currently used. When the
WARNING vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the
With a backrest inclined too far to the position is automatically retrieved if the Func‐
rear, the protective effect of the safety belt tion, refer to page 68, is activated for this pur‐
cannot be ensured anymore. There is a danger pose.
of sliding under the safety belt in an accident.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Adjust Adjustments in detail
the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the ▷ Forward/back.

76
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Adjusting Controls

▷ Height.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section

cardiagn.com
of the switch:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
▷ Seat tilt. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.

Backrest width
Change the width of the back‐
rest using the side wings to ad‐
just the lateral support.
▷ Backrest tilt.

Shoulder support

▷ Thigh support.

Also supports the back in the shoulder area:

▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.

77
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles. Rear seats

Gentleman function General information
The seats in the rear can be used using the
The concept seat adjustment switch in the center armrest
The front passenger seat can be adjusted with or via BMW Touch Command.
the switches of the driver's seat, e.g. to in‐
crease the legroom in the rear. Information
WARNING
Overview
There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There is
risk of injuries. Make sure that the area of
movement of the center armrest is clear during
folding down.◀

cardiagn.com
Electrically adjustable seats

Overview

Gentleman function

Switching on

1. Press button. The LED lights up.

2. Adjust the front passenger seat on your
own seat.
If needed, store the memory position, refer 1 Resetting to standard position
to page 87, for the front passenger seat. 2 Head restraint, shoulder support
3 Lumbar support
Switch off
4 Folding the footrest out/in
Press button and hold until LED goes
out. 5 Forward/backward, tilt

The function deactivates itself automatically 6 Backrest

after some time. 7 Adjust front passenger seat

If the safety switch, refer to page 71, is

BMW Touch Command pressed, the seats cannot be adjusted.
The front passenger seat can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command. Adjustments in detail
▷ Forward/back.

78
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Adjusting Controls

Shoulder support

▷ Seat tilt.
Also supports the back in the shoulder area:
▷ Results in a relaxed seating position.
▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles.

Folding the footrest out/in

cardiagn.com
Press the upper/lower section of
the switch:
The footrest on the backrest of
▷ Backrest tilt.
the front passenger seat is
folded out/in.
The distance between the front passenger
seat and the rear seat must be sufficiently
large to unfold the footrest.

Adjusting the front passenger seat

from the rear

The concept
Lumbar support The front passenger seat can be operated
from the rear, e.g. to increase the legroom in
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
the rear.
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture. General information
With the button for adjusting the Shoulder
▷ Press the front/rear section
support, refer to page 79, it is possible to set
of the switch:
the angle of the screen in the rear on the pas‐
The curvature is increased/ senger side.
decreased.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the switch:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.

79
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

Adjusting General information

Always make sure that safety belts are being
worn by all occupants before driving off.
For the occupants' safety the belt locking
mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the
belt out of the holder when applying it.
Although airbags enhance safety by providing
added protection, they are not a substitute for
safety belts.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐
1. Press button.
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted.
2. Adjust the passenger seat, e.g., forward/
▷ The two outer safety belt buckles,
back.
integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐
sengers sitting on the left and right.
3. Press the button to deactivate the

cardiagn.com
function. ▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely
intended for the center passenger.
The function deactivates itself automatically
after some time.
Information
Resetting to standard position WARNING
If the safety belt is used by more than
one person, the protective effect of the safety
belt cannot be ensured anymore. There is risk
of injuries or danger to life. Do not allow more
than one person to wear a single safety belt.
Infants and children are not allowed in an occu‐
pant's lap, but must be transported and re‐
spectively secured in designated child restraint
systems.◀

Press button to reset to standard po‐ WARNING

sition. The protective effect of the safety belts
can be limited or lost when safety belts are fas‐
The process is canceled if the button is
tened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened
pressed again.
safety belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is risk of injuries or
Safety belts danger to life. Make sure that all occupants are
wearing safety belts correctly.◀
Seats with safety belt
The vehicle has four or five seating positions,
each of which is equipped with a safety belt.

80
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Adjusting Controls

Correct use of safety belts Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
▷ Wear the belt twist-free and as tight to and front passenger seat
your body as possible over your lap and The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐
shoulders. nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
▷ Wear the belt deep on your hips over your belts are positioned correctly. The
lap. The belt may not press on your stom‐ safety belt reminder is active at speeds above
ach. approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated
▷ Do not wear the belt on your throat, rub it if objects are placed on the front passenger
on sharp edges, guide it or jam it in across seat.
hard or fragile objects.
▷ Avoid thick clothing. Safety mode
▷ Re-tighten the belt frequently upward In critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap‐
around your upper body. plication, the front safety belts tighten auto‐
matically.
Buckling the belt If the situation passes without an accident oc‐

cardiagn.com
curring, the belt tension relaxes.
General information If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the
belt before continuing on your trip.

Damage to safety belts

WARNING
The protective effect of the safety belts
may not be fully functional or fail in the follow‐
ing situations:
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
▷ Safety belts are damaged, soiled or
the belt buckle.
changed in any other way.
▷ Safety belt buckle is damaged or heavily
Tensioning the safety belt soiled.
automatically
▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
When the belt is closed, the driver's and pas‐ modified.
senger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
ened once after driving away. Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is risk of inju‐
ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
Unbuckling the belt
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
1. Hold the belt firmly. retractors or belt anchors and keep them
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐ accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
nism. other qualified service center or repair shop.◀

81
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

Front head restraints Active head restraint

In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐
Information tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐
ically reduces the distance from the head.
WARNING
Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐
A missing protective effect due to re‐
aged otherwise:
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and Have the active head restraint checked and if
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head needed replaced.
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐ Adjusting the height
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀

WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.

cardiagn.com
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint. Adjusting electrically.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a Distance to back of head: manual head
head restraint. restraints
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀

Correctly adjusted head restraint

General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.

▷ Forward: by pulling.
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is ▷ Back: press the button and push the head
approximately at ear level. restraint toward the rear.

Distance Distance to back of head: electrical

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint head restraints
is as close as possible to the back of the head. The head restraint is automatically reposi‐
tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted.

82
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Adjusting Controls

Adjusting the side extensions Correctly adjusted head restraint

General information
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event
of an accident.

Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Fold forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position. Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed. Adjusting the center head restraint

cardiagn.com
To improve the view to the rear, the center
head restraint can be folded to the rear. Only
Rear head restraints push the head restraint down if no one will be
sitting in the center seat.
Information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is risk of injuries. Install head
restraints on occupied seats prior to driving
and make sure that the center of the head re‐
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level.◀
▷ To the rear: press button, arrow 1, and fold
WARNING the head restraint backward.
Objects on the head restraint reduce the ▷ To the front: fold head restraint forward un‐
protective effect in the head and neck area. til the head restraint engages.
There is risk of injuries.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers,
directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, e.g. pillows,
while driving.◀

83
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

Adjusting the height Adjusting the side extensions

Manual head restraints

Fold the side extensions on the head restraint

forward for increased lateral support in the
The height of the outer head restraints can be resting position.
adjusted.
▷ To raise: push. Pillows for head restraints in the rear

cardiagn.com
▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push Only use the pillow when the vehicle is
headrest down. switched off.

1. There are two pushbuttons on the upper

Power head restraints tab of the pillow. Pull the upper tab through
the loop on the top of the head restraint.
Information
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀

Button in the vehicle

2. Close both pushbuttons.

The height of the head restraint can be ad‐

justed electrically.
3. The head restraint folds into the topmost
The height adjustment of the head restraint is
position. Close the pushbutton on the
deactivated when the safety switch for the rear
windows, refer to page 71, has been pressed.

84
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Adjusting Controls

lower tab and the pushbutton on the bot‐ Overview

tom of the head restraint.

1 Adjusting  85
2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor
Removing
3 Fold in and out  86
The head restraints cannot be removed.

Selecting a mirror

cardiagn.com
Mirrors To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Exterior mirrors

General information Adjusting electrically

The mirror on the passenger side is more The setting corresponds to the direction
curved than the driver's side mirror. in which the button is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐
ror setting is stored for the profile currently
Saving positions
used. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐
mote control, the position is automatically re‐ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer
trieved if this function is active. to page 87.

Information Adjusting manually

In case of electrical malfunction press edges of
WARNING
mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. The distance to the traffic Automatic Curb Monitor
behind could be incorrectly estimated, e.g.
while changing lanes. There is risk of an acci‐ The concept
dent. Estimate the distance to the traffic be‐
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
hind by looking over your shoulder.◀
the front passenger side is tilted downward.
This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

85
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

Activating Interior rearview mirror, automatic

dimming feature
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position. Overview
2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror
position.

Fold in and out

CAUTION
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
Photocells are used for control:
hicle can be damaged in car washes. There is
risk of property damage. Before washing, fold ▷ In the mirror glass.

cardiagn.com
in the mirrors by hand or with the button.◀ ▷ On the back of the mirror.

Press button.
Functional requirement
Possible at speeds up to approx. For proper operation:
15 mph/20 km/h. ▷ Keep the photocells clean.
Beneficial in the following situations: ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside
▷ In car washes. rearview mirror and the windshield.
▷ On narrow roads.
Rear vanity mirror
▷ For folding mirrors back out that were
folded away manually. Folding down
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature

Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ Press vanity mirror.
med. Photocells are used to control the Interior
The vanity mirror folds down.
rearview mirror, refer to page 86.
The angle can be adjusted by hand.

Folding up
Press the mirror up.

86
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Adjusting Controls

Steering wheel Switching on/off

Press button.
Information
▷ On: the LED lights up.
WARNING ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐ If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 min,
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is steering wheel heating is automatically acti‐
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel vated again.
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀

Power steering wheel adjustment Seat, mirror, and steering

wheel memory
Adjusting
The concept
Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror and

cardiagn.com
steering wheel positions can be stored per
profile, refer to page 58, and called up.

Information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
Move the steering wheel to the preferred movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
height and angle to suit your seating position. There is risk of an accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station‐
ary.◀
Storing the position
Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer WARNING
to page 87. There is risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
Heated steering wheel property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
Overview justment.◀

Heated steering wheel

87
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

Overview The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐

ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.
Front The comfort function is not available on the
driver's seat while driving.

Safety mode
While driving, a profile can be called up on the
driver's seat:
Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until
the adjustment procedure is completed.

BMW Touch Command

The memory function can also be operated on
Rear
the front passenger seat and in the rear via
BMW Touch Command.

cardiagn.com
Massage function
The concept
Depending on the program, the massage func‐
tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood
circulation and can avoid fatigue.

Storing General information

1. Set the desired position. Eight different massage programs can be se‐
lected:
2. Press button. The writing on the
▷ Pelvis activation.
button lights up.
▷ Upper body activation.
3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED
is lit. Lighting of the writing goes out. ▷ Full body activation.

Button was pressed inadvertently: ▷ Back massage.

Press button again. ▷ Shoulder massage.

Lighting of the writing goes out. ▷ Lumbar massage.

▷ Upper body training.
Calling up settings ▷ Full body training.

Comfort function
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The corresponding seat position is performed
automatically.

88
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Adjusting Controls

Overview Press button once for each massage level.

The highest level is active when three LEDs
Front are lit.

Switch off

Via the iDrive

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
Massage function 5. "Seat massage"
6. "Level"

Rear 7. "OFF"

cardiagn.com
Using the button
Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.

Adjusting the massage program

About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"

Massage function 2. "Vehicle settings"

3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select desired seat.
Switching on
5. "Seat massage"
Via the iDrive 6. Select desired setting.
1. "My Vehicle"
BMW Touch Command
2. "Vehicle settings"
Operation of the massage function is also pos‐
3. "Seat comfort" sible via BMW Touch Command.
4. Select desired seat.
5. "Seat massage"
6. "Level" Captain’s chair
7. Select intensity 1–3. The concept
The Captain’s chair offers maximum legroom
Using the button
and increased traveling comfort to the rear
Whole-body training is started. passenger on the front passenger's side.

89
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

General information Resetting to standard position

The following settings are applied to the seat
automatically on system activation:
▷ The front passenger's seat moves forward
and adjusts the height if necessary.
▷ Backrest and head restraint of the front
passenger seat are inclined forward.
▷ The tilt of the screen in the rear is adjusted
to the rest incline of the passenger's seat.
▷ The head restraint on the backrest of the
front passenger seat folds out. Press button to reset to standard po‐
sition.
▷ The backrest of the rear seat inclines to the
rear. The process is canceled if the button is
The adjusted end position can be manually ad‐ pressed again.
justed, refer to page 78, and stored using the

cardiagn.com
Memory function, refer to page 87, if needed.
Vitality programs
Information
The concept
WARNING
Different muscles can be trained using the vi‐
If the Captain’s chair is activated, the
tality program in the rear. Active movements
view on the right exterior mirror can be ob‐
help in preventing signs of fatigue.
structed. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the front passenger seat such that the view on
General information
the exterior mirror is not obstructed.◀
After each start of the vitalization program,
there is a calibration run. Here the intensity of
Overview
the exercises is set individually.
Videos on the respective screens in the rear
show, which motions should be executed. A
display informs about the still-remaining dura‐
tion of each exercise. There is direct feedback
to the exercise executed by a display of stars
and a color bar display:
▷ Green: exercise was correctly executed.
▷ Gray: the pressure was too weak.
▷ Red: the pressure was too weak.
Captain’s chair
The goal of the exercises is to keep the bar
display in the green area as long as possible.
Switching on Every exercise is evaluated by awarding stars.
Press button.

90
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Adjusting Controls

Switching on Rear
On the screens in the rear:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Seat comfort"
3. "BMW Vitality Program"

Switch off
On the screens in the rear:

1. Press left arrow button on the remote con‐

trol in the rear. Seat and armrest heating
2. "Stop"
Switching on
BMW Touch Command
The vitality program can also be operated us‐ Press button once for each tempera‐

cardiagn.com
ing BMW Touch Command. ture level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
mate control display.
Seat and armrest heating If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes, the seat and armrest heating is acti‐
General information vated automatically with the temperature se‐
The system heats seats and armrests as lected last.
needed. Seat heating can also be used without When ECO PRO, refer to page 241, is acti‐
armrest heating. vated, the heater output is reduced.

Overview
Switch off
Front Press button and hold until bar display
on the climate control display goes
out.

Temperature distribution
The heating action in the seat cushion and
backrest can be distributed in different ways.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
Seat and armrest heating 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Seat and armrest heating"

91
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Adjusting

5. Select desired seat. Rear

6. Pres the controller and turn to set the tem‐
perature distribution.

Switching armrest heating on/off

About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Seat and armrest heating" Active seat ventilation
5. Select desired seat.
6. "Heat up armrest together with seat"
Switching on
Press button once for each ventilation

cardiagn.com
Active seat ventilation level.
Highest level if three bars are shown on the cli‐
The concept mate control display.
The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are
After a short time, the system automatically
cooled by means of integrated fans.
moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐
The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐ cessive cooling.
cle interior is overheated or for continuous
cooling at high temperatures. Switch off

Overview Press button and hold until bar display

on the climate control display goes
Front out.

Active seat ventilation

92
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Transporting children safely Controls

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

The right place for children

Information Only transport children younger than 13 years
of age or shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm in the rear in
WARNING
child restraint systems provided in accordance
Unattended children or animals can with the age, weight and size of the child.

cardiagn.com
move the vehicle and endanger themselves
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. system can no longer be used due to their age,
▷ Releasing the parking brake. weight and size.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
Children on the front passenger seat
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
Before using a child restraint system on the
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not knee, and side airbags on the front passenger
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ side are deactivated. Automatic deactivation of
hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting front-seat passenger airbags, refer to
and lock the vehicle.◀ page 138.

Children should always be in the rear Information

WARNING WARNING
Persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm cannot Active front-seat passenger airbags can
correctly fasten the safety belt without suitable injure a child in a child restraint system when
additional restraint systems. The protective ef‐ the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐
fect of the safety belts can be limited or lost ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause ad‐ GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀
ditional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident
or during braking and evasive maneuvers.
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure
persons shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suita‐
ble restraint systems.◀
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the back seat.

93
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Transporting children safely

Installing child restraint offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐

dent.
systems
If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
Information cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐
Pay attention to the specifications of the child
til the best possible belt guide position is
restraint system manufacturer when selecting,
reached.
installing, and using child restraint systems.
WARNING Backrest width
The stability of the child restraint system Adjustable backrest width: before installing a
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat child restraint system in the front passenger
adjustment or improper installation of the child seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
seat. There is risk of injuries or danger to life. not change the backrest width again and do
Make sure that the child restraint system fits not call up a memory position.
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests Child seat security

cardiagn.com
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints or remove them.◀

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front-seat passenger airbags can The rear safety belts and the front passenger
injure a child in a child restraint system when safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐
the airbags are activated. There is risk of inju‐ ten child restraint systems.
ries. Make sure that the front-seat passenger The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐ nently locked to fasten child restraint systems.
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up.◀

After installing a child restraint system in the Locking the safety belt
front passenger seat, make sure that the front, 1. Pull out the strap completely.
knee and side airbags on the front passenger
side are deactivated. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 138. 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it
tight against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
Seat position and height
Before installing a child restraint system, move
Unlocking the safety belt
the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
ble and bring it up to medium height to obtain 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle.
the best possible position for the belt and to 2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely.

94
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Transporting children safely Controls

LATCH child restraint system

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ Before installing LATCH child
dren. restraint systems
Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐
Information straint system.
Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐
mation of the child restraint system manufac‐ Without comfort seats in the rear:
turer when installing and using LATCH child Assembly of LATCH child restraint
restraint fixing system. systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
General information
erly connected.
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child With comfort rear seats: Assembly of

cardiagn.com
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child LATCH child restraint fixing systems
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their
basic position, refer to page 80.
Information
2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest
WARNING back slightly.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐ 3. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective turer's information.
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is risk of injuries or 4. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐ erly connected.
chors are securely engaged and that the 5. After mounting, move the backrest back up
LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐ slightly so that the child restraint system
curely against the backrest.◀ rests lightly against the backrest.

Position Child restraint fixing system with a

tether strap
The corresponding symbol shows the
mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Mounting points
Seats equipped with lower anchors are
marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐ The respective symbol shows the an‐
bols. It is not recommended to use the chor for the upper retaining strap.
inner lower anchors of standard outer Seats with an upper Top Tether are
LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint marked with this symbol. It can be found on
system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
seat belt instead for the middle seat.

95
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Transporting children safely

Information Guide it over the head restraint of the mid‐

dle seat.
CAUTION
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
The mounting points for the upper re‐
the anchor.
taining straps of child restraint systems are
only provided for these retaining straps. When 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
other objects are mounted, the anchors can be down.
damaged. There is risk of property damage. 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐
per retaining straps.◀
Locking the doors and
Retaining strap guide windows in the rear
WARNING
Doors
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
tive effect can be reduced. There is risk of inju‐

cardiagn.com
ries. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is
not guided across sharp edges and without
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀

Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the outside

only.

Safety switch for the rear

1 Direction of travel Press button on the driver's door if
2 Head restraint children are being transported in the
3 Hook for upper retaining strap rear.
4 Mounting point This locks various functions so that they can‐
5 Rear window shelf not be operated from the rear: safety switch,
6 Seat backrest refer to page 71.

7 Upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to

the mounting point
1. Remove the mounting point cover.
2. Raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the supports of the head restraint.

96
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving Controls

Driving
Vehicle features and options WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
This chapter describes all standard, country-
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
specific and optional features offered with the
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
series. It also describes features that are not
rolling.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
also applies to safety-related functions and against rolling away, observe the following:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Set the parking brake.
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
respective features and systems. front wheels in the direction of the curb.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
Start/Stop button

cardiagn.com
CAUTION
The concept In the case of repeated starting attempts
Pressing the Start/Stop button or repeated starting in quick succession, the
switches drive readiness on or fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
off. The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
risk of property damage. Avoid repeated start‐
Drive readiness starts with the
ing in quick succession.◀
brake pedal pressed when you
press the Start/Stop button.
Switching on drive readiness
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
drive readiness back off and operating readi‐
Steptronic transmission
ness, refer to page 19, is switched back on.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Drive readiness The ignition is activated automatically for a

certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐
Information gine starts.
Most of the indicator and warning lights in the
DANGER
instrument cluster light up for a varied length
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐ of time.
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ Switch off drive readiness
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐ Steptronic transmission
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
vehicle stopped.
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀ 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off.

97
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving

3. Set the parking brake. Displays in the instrument cluster

The display in the tachometer
Before driving into a car wash indicates that the Auto Start/
So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ Stop function is ready for an Au‐
serve instructions for going into an automatic tomatic engine start.
car wash, refer to page 291.

The display indicates that the

conditions for an automatic en‐
Auto Start/Stop function gine stop have not been met.

The concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a Functional limitations
stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic
The engine is not switched off automatically in
lights. Drive readiness remains switched on.
the following situations:
The engine starts again automatically for driv‐

cardiagn.com
ing off. ▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough.
Information ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
After every engine start via the Start/Stop but‐ matic climate control is running.
ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is activated or ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
deactivated, according to the last setting, refer or cooled to the required level.
to page 99. If the Auto Start/Stop function is
▷ If window condensation is imminent.
active, it is available as soon as a speed of ap‐
prox. 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h is exceeded. ▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
perature.
Engine stop ▷ Engine cooling is required.
The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
ing a stop under the following conditions: steering wheel is being turned.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
tion D. ▷ At higher elevations.
▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked.
vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held
▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated.
by Automatic Hold.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced ▷ Selector lever position in N or R.
when the engine is switched off. ▷ After driving in reverse.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.

Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:

98
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving Controls

▷ By releasing the brake pedal. Activating/deactivating the system

▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: press manually
the accelerator pedal.
Using the button
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.

Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
Some indicator lights light up for a varied Press button.
length of time.
The engine can only be started via the Start/

cardiagn.com
▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is
Stop button. deactivated.
The engine is not automatically switched
Functional limitations
off.
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
The engine is started during an automatic
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
engine stop.
lowing situations:
The Auto Start/Stop function is deacti‐
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
vated in selector lever position M/S or in
when the cooling function is switched on.
SPORT drive mode.
▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when
▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is
the heating is switched on.
activated.
▷ If window condensation is imminent.
▷ The steering wheel is turned. Switching off the vehicle during an
▷ Change from selector lever position D to N automatic engine stop
or R. During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
▷ Change from selector lever position P to N, can be switched off permanently, e. g., when
D or R. leaving it.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. 1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement. ▷ Drive readiness is switched off.
▷ Operating readiness is switched on.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged
automatically.
2. Set the parking brake.

99
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving

Automatic deactivation There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not

In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
as if the driver were absent. and lock the vehicle.◀

Malfunction Overview
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to
continue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brake
The concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐

cardiagn.com
Parking brake
cle from rolling when it is parked.

Information Setting
WARNING Pull the switch.
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into LED on the switch lights up.
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against The indicator lamp in the instrument
rolling. cluster lights up red. The parking brake
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured is set.
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake. While driving
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the Use as emergency brake while driving:
front wheels in the direction of the curb. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure hard while the switch is being pulled.
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐
WARNING nal sounds and the brake lights light
Unattended children or animals can up.
move the vehicle and endanger themselves A Check Control message is displayed.
and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
If the vehicle is slowed down to a speed of ap‐
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows. Releasing
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral. With drive readiness switched on:
▷ Using vehicle equipment.

100
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving Controls

Press the switch while stepping on the Information

brake pedal or selector lever position P is
WARNING
set.
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
The LED and indicator lamp go out.
motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
The parking brake is released. dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
Automatic release In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
The parking brake is released automatically against rolling away, observe the following:
when you drive away. ▷ Set the parking brake.
The LED and indicator lamp go out. ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.
Automatic Hold ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀
The concept
CAUTION
This system assists the driver by automatically

cardiagn.com
setting and releasing the brake, such as when If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic
moving in stop-and-go traffic. Hold engages the parking brake. It prevents
the vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
risk of property damage. Deactivate Automatic
it is stationary.
Hold prior to entering the car wash.◀
On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle
from rolling backward when driving off. WARNING
Unattended children or animals can
General information move the vehicle and endanger themselves
Under the following conditions, the parking and traffic, e.g. with the following actions:
brake is automatically engaged: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
▷ Drive readiness is deactivated. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehi‐ ▷ Opening and closing of doors or windows.
cle is stationary.
▷ Shifting the selector lever into neutral.
▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
still using the parking brake.
There is risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
The indicator lamp changes from green leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
to red. hicle. Carry remote control along when exiting
and lock the vehicle.◀
The indicator lamp goes out.

101
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving

Overview The indicator lamp changes from green

to red.

The parking brake is not set if the drive-ready

state is deactivated while the vehicle is coast‐
ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.
Automatic Hold remains active during the en‐
gine stop brought about by the Auto Start/
Stop function.

Switching function readiness off

Automatic Hold
Press button.
The LED on the button goes out.
Establishing function readiness from
Automatic Hold The indicator lamp goes out.

cardiagn.com
Press the button while pressing on the
brake pedal. Automatic Hold is switched off.
The LED on the button lights up. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
press on the brake pedal to switch it off.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
Automatic Hold is functional. Malfunction
After every new vehicles start, the last In the event of a failure or malfunction of the
selected setting is active. parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐
ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
After a power failure
Function readiness is established.
After stepping on the brake pedal, e.g. when Putting the parking brake into
stopping at a traffic light, the vehicle is auto‐ operation
matically secured against rolling. 1. Turn on operations.
The indicator lamp lights up green.
2. Pull the switch while stepping on the
Step on the accelerator pedal to drive
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
off.
set and then push.
The brake is released automatically.
It may take several seconds for the brake to be
The indicator lamp goes out. put into operation. Any sounds associated with
this are normal.
Parking The indicator lamp in the instrument
The parking brake is engaged automatically if cluster goes out as soon as the parking
the vehicle is stopped with Automatic Hold and brake is ready for operation.
the drive-ready state is deactivated.

102
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving Controls

Turn signal, high beams, Signaling briefly

headlight flasher Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
Turn signal to flash.

Turn signal in exterior mirror High beams, headlight flasher

When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
on the exterior mirror are easy to see.

Using turn signals

▷ High beams, arrow 1.

cardiagn.com
▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
The turn signal lever returns into is starting po‐ wipe
sition after actuation.
To switch off manually, slightly tap the lever to General information
the resistance point. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
Triple turn signal activation them to become worn more quickly.

Slightly tap lever.

Information
The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted.
CAUTION
About iDrive:
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
1. "My Vehicle" the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
2. "Vehicle settings" motor overheat on switching on. There is risk
of property damage. Defrost the windshield
3. "Lighting"
prior to switching the wipers on.◀
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
6. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.

103
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving

Switching on The rain sensor automatically controls the time

between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐
shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐
ror.

Activating/deactivating

The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐

sition when released.
▷ Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
The wipers switch to intermittent operation
when the vehicle is stationary.

cardiagn.com
▷ Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap once Press button on the wiper lever.
beyond the resistance point.
Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped
Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐ with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up.
hicle comes to standstill.
When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper
operation is deactivated.
Switch off and brief wipe
During trip interruption with the rain sensor
switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐
prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐
cally activated again.

CAUTION
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is risk of property damage. Deactivate
the rain sensor in car washes.◀
The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐
sition when released.
▷ Single wipe: press down once.
▷ To switch off from normal wiper speed:
press down once.
▷ To switch off from fast wiper speed: press
down twice.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor

The concept
Without the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.

104
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving Controls

Setting the interval time or sensitivity CAUTION

of the rain sensor When the wiper water container is
empty, the wash pump cannot work as in‐
tended. There is risk of property damage. Do
not use the washer system when the wash wa‐
ter container is empty.◀

Windshield washer nozzles

The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐
cally heated while operating readiness is
switched on.
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency
or sensitivity of the rain sensor. Fold-out position of the wipers
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain Fold wipers back when you want to change the
sensor. blades or with pending low temperatures.

cardiagn.com
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain WARNING
sensor.
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, damage may occur to parts of the
Clean the windshield, headlights vehicle or body parts can be jammed. There is
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀

1. Turn on operations.
2. With icy conditions make sure that blades
are not frozen to the windshield.
3. Press and hold wiper lever downward, until
Pull the wiper lever towards you. the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐
The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ tion.
shield and activates the wipers briefly.

In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐

lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐
vated.
WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is risk of an accident. Only use the
washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.◀

105
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving

After the wipers are folded back down, the Washer fluid reservoir
wiper system must be reactivated.

1. Switch on drive readiness and press and

hold the wiper lever downward again.
2. Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.

Washer fluid
Information All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
ervoir in the engine compartment.
WARNING
Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐
Some antifreeze agents can contain
centrate and tap water and – if required – with a
harmful substances and are flammable. There
washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐
is risk of fire and risk of injuries. Observe the
turer's recommendations.

cardiagn.com
instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐ Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐ right mixture.
erating materials out of reach of children. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and
United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure
regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual water; this could damage the wiper system.
states; do not exceed the allowable washer Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the ferent manufacturers because they can clog
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ the windshield washer nozzles.
tainer. Recommended minimum fill quantity:
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐ 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀

WARNING
Steptronic transmission
Improperly executed work under the
hood can damage components and lead to a Information
safety risk. There is risk of accidents or risk of
WARNING
property damage. Have work under the hood
be executed by a dealer’s service center or an‐ An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀ motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, observe the following:
▷ Set the parking brake.
▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
front wheels in the direction of the curb.

106
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving Controls

▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure Kickdown

the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀ Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance. Step on the accelerator pedal
Selector lever positions beyond the resistance point at the full throttle
position.
D Drive
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ Engaging selector lever positions
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
automatically. General information
To reduce fuel consumption, the engine is au‐ To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you
tomatically decoupled from the transmission select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake
under the conditions described for Coasting, pedal until you are ready to start.
refer to page 245. It is not possible to shift out of selector lever
position P until the engine is running and the
R is Reverse brake is applied.
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. With the vehicle is stationary, press on the

cardiagn.com
brake pedal before shifting out of selector lever
N Neutral: position P or N; otherwise, the shift command
The vehicle may roll in selector lever posi‐ will not be executed: shift lock.
tion N. A block prevents the inadvertent switching to
Engage selector lever position N, e.g. in car selector lever position R or the inadvertent
washes, refer to page 291. change from selector lever position P.
With operating readiness switched off, refer to
page 20, selector lever position P is engaged Engaging selector lever position D, N,
automatically. R

P Park
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The
drive wheels are blocked.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally:
▷ After drive readiness, refer to page 97, is
switched off and selector lever position R
or D is engaged.
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐
▷ If operating readiness is switched off and
rection, beyond a resistance point if needed.
selector lever position N is engaged.
After releasing the selector lever, it returns to
▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the
its center position.
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D or
R is set.

107
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving

Canceling the lock Activating the M/S manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left out of
selector lever position D.
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
backward.
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, e.g., M1.
If the situation requires, the Steptronic trans‐
Press unlock button.
mission continues to shift automatically.
Example: once maximum engine speed is at‐
Engage selector lever position P tained, M/S manual mode is automatically up‐
shifted as needed.

cardiagn.com
Switching to manual mode
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐
ward.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
Press button P. not possible if the engine speed is too high.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
Sport program and manual mode strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐
lected gear.
Activating the sport program
Steptronic Sport transmission:
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S
manual mode
If drive mode SPORT, refer to page 111, is se‐
lected, the Steptronic Sport transmission does
not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode
once the maximum speed is reached.
In addition, there is no downshift for kickdown.
With the respective transmission version, the
Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
tor lever position D. taneously operating the kickdown and the left
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ shift paddle. However, this effect is not pro‐
ment cluster, e.g., S1. duced via the shift paddles when switching
The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ briefly from selector lever position D to manual
vated. mode.

108
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving Controls

Ending the sport program/manual been no acceleration or shifting of the shift

mode paddles within a certain amount of time, the
Push the selector lever to the right. transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Shift paddles Displays in the instrument cluster

The selector lever position is
displayed, e.g.: P.

Electronic unlocking of the

transmission lock

General information

cardiagn.com
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both Electronically unlock the transmission lock to
hands on the steering wheel. maneuver vehicle from the danger area.
▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin
the engine.
▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the respective transmission version, Engaging selector lever position N
the lowest possible gear can be selected
1. Depress the brake pedal.
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle.
2. Press and hold the Start/Stop button. The
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine
starter must audibly start.
and road speeds, for example downshifting is
not possible if the engine speed is too high. 3. Press and hold the selector lever into se‐
lector lever position N, until selector lever
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐
position N is displayed in the instrument
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
cluster.
If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are
A corresponding Check Control message
used to shift gears in automatic mode, the
is displayed.
transmission temporarily switches to manual
mode. 4. Release Start/Stop button and selector
lever.
If the selector lever is still in selector lever po‐
sition D with the respective transmission ver‐ 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
sion, it is possible to switch back into the auto‐ stops.
matic mode: 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle. and secure it against moving on its own.
or
Launch Control
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle. The concept
In the manual mode, after conservative driving Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
for a certain amount of time or if there has on surfaces with good traction.

109
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving

General information Driving Dynamics Control

The use of Launch Control causes premature
component wear since this function represents The concept
a very heavy load for the vehicle. The Driving Dynamics Control influences the
Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. The
refer to page 234, period. vehicle can be adjusted depending on the sit‐
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC uation using various driving modes.
again as soon as possible. The following systems are affected:
An experienced driver may be able to achieve ▷ Engine characteristics.
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. ▷ Steptronic transmission.
▷ Dynamic Damping Control.
Requirements
▷ Air suspension
Launch Control is available when the engine is
warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving ▷ Active roll stabilization.
of at least 6 miles/10 km. ▷ Integral Active Steering.

cardiagn.com
To start with Launch Control do not steer the ▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
steering wheel. ▷ Cruise control.
▷ Backrest width for comfort seats.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running: Overview

1. Press button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
Controls
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐ Drive modes
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within Press but‐ Drive mode Configuration
3 seconds, release the brake. ton
Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ SPORT INDIVIDUAL
mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes.
COMFORT PLUS
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
again.
ADAPTIVE

110
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving Controls

Selecting a driving mode Driving modes in detail

Press button for the desired driving mode
once. COMFORT

Activating configuration of the driving The concept

mode Balanced tuning between dynamic and con‐
Press button for the desired driving mode sev‐ sumption-optimized driving.
eral times.
Switching on
Configure INDIVIDUAL driving mode Press button repeatedly until COM‐
1. Activate desired driving mode with Driving FORT is displayed in the instrument
Dynamics Control switch. cluster.
2. "Configure INDIVIDUAL"
Select desired setting. COMFORT PLUS
The individual configuration of the driving

cardiagn.com
The concept
mode is taken over for the active profile. The
last set configuration is activated directly when Particularly comfortable tuning for optimum
the driving mode is called up. With activating of traveling comfort.
the drive-ready state, the COMFORT driving
mode is selected automatically. Switching on
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
Displays in the instrument cluster FORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
The selected drive mode is dis‐ ment cluster.
played in the instrument cluster.
SPORT

Display on the Control Display The concept

Drive mode changes can be briefly shown on Dynamic tuning for higher agility.
the Control Display.
Switching on
About iDrive:
Press button. SPORT is displayed in
1. "My Vehicle"
the instrument cluster.
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control" SPORT INDIVIDUAL
4. "Driving mode information in control
display" The concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the
SPORT INDIVIDUAL drive mode.

111
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving

Configuration "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".

About iDrive:
ADAPTIVE
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings" The concept
3. "Driving Experience Control" Comfort-oriented drive mode, whose tuning is
4. "Configure SPORT INDIVIDUAL" automatically adjusted to the driving situation
and driving style.
5. Select desired setting.
If the navigation system is active, upcoming
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ road sections are considered as well.
rently used.
Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard Switching on
settings:
Press button. ADAPTIVE is displayed
"Reset to SPORT STANDARD". in the instrument cluster.

ECO PRO

cardiagn.com
The concept
Consumption-optimized tuning, refer to
page 241.

Switching on
Press button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster.

ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL

The concept
Individual settings can be adjusted in the ECO
PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode.

Configuration
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driving Experience Control"
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
5. Select desired setting.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:

112
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Displays Controls

Displays
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Instrument cluster
The concept
The instrument cluster is a variable display. In Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
the event of a program change, the display may differ from the way they are shown in this

cardiagn.com
rendition adapts to the respective program Owner's Manual.
through the Driving Dynamics Control. The
change of the display type can be deactivated
via iDrive.

Overview

1 Fuel gauge  118 External temperature  118

2 Speedometer Driver assistance system displays
3 Time  118 4 Tachometer  118

113
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Displays

Selection lists  121 7 On-board computer  122

ECO PRO displays  241 8 Driver assistance system displays
Navigation display Speed limit detection  120
Messages, e.g., Check Control 9 Reset miles  123
5 Engine temperature  118
6 Transmission display  106
Status, Driving Dynamics Control  110

Adjusting the view ▷ "Speed limit exceeded": if the speed rec‐

ognized by speed limit detection is ex‐
The concept ceeded, the exceeded range is marked red
In addition to the driving program views, the in‐ in the speedometer.
strument cluster can be adjusted to three dif‐ ▷ Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
ferent operating modes.

cardiagn.com
"Magnifier function": the current speed is
shown enlarged in the speedometer.
Adjusting
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle" Check Control

2. "System settings" The concept
3. "Displays" The Check Control system monitors functions
4. "Instrument panel" in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
5. Select desired setting. in the monitored systems.
▷ "STANDARD": All displays on the in‐ A Check Control message is displayed as a
strument cluster are active. combination of indicator or warning lights and
text messages in the instrument cluster and in
▷ "REDUCED" All displays on the instru‐
the Head-up Display.
ment cluster are reduced to the essen‐
tial. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a
text message may appear on the Control Dis‐
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": All displays on the in‐
play.
strument cluster are active. Individual
displays can be individually configured.
Indicator/warning lights
Individual view
General information
▷ "Driving mode display": when the driving
The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐
program is switched into ECO PRO or
ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐
SPORT, the instrument cluster automati‐
nations and colors.
cally switched into the respective view.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
▷ "Traffic sign detection Speed Limit Info":
functioning and light up temporarily when drive
the traffic signs and additional signs recog‐
readiness is switched on.
nized via speed limit detection are dis‐
played.

114
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Displays Controls

Red lights DSC Dynamic Stability Control

Flashing: DSC controls the drive and
Safety belt reminder
braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐
Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving
the driver or passenger side is not style to the driving circumstances.
buckled. The safety belt reminder can Illuminated: DSC failed. Have system checked
also be activated if objects are placed on the immediately by a dealer’s service center or an‐
front passenger seat. other qualified service center or repair shop.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned For additional information, refer to Dynamic
correctly. Stability Control DSC, refer to page 163.

Airbag system DSC Dynamic Stability Control is

Airbag system and belt tensioner are deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
not working. Control is activated
Have the vehicle checked immediately Dynamic Stability Control DSC is

cardiagn.com
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐
fied service center or repair shop. trol DTC is switched on.
For additional information, refer to Dynamic
Parking brake Stability Control DSC, refer to page 163, and
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
The parking brake is set. page 164.
For additional information, refer to Re‐
lease parking brake, refer to page 100.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
Brake system
tire inflation pressure in a tire.
Braking system disrupted. Continue to Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
drive moderately. tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
Have the vehicle checked immediately neuvers.
by a dealer’s service center or another For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐
qualified service center or repair shop. fer to page 268.

Yellow lights Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

Anti-lock Braking System ABS Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor

signals a loss of tire inflation pressure
Avoid sudden braking as much as pos‐ in a tire.
sible. Braking force boost may not be
working. Stop cautiously. Take into ac‐ Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid
count the longer brake distance. Have sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
checked immediately by a dealer’s Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no
service center or another qualified flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be
service center or repair shop. detected.

115
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Displays

▷ Interference through systems or devices Parking lights, headlight control

with the same radio frequency: After leav‐
Parking lights or headlights are acti‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
vated.
automatically becomes active again.
For additional information, refer to
▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform
Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐
the reset of the system again.
fer to page 129.
▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted: Have it checked by a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service Lane departure warning
center or repair shop as needed. The system is activated. At least one
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked imme‐ lane marking was detected and warn‐
diately by a dealer’s service center or an‐ ings can be issued.
other qualified service center or repair For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐
shop. ture warning, refer to page 150.
For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor, refer to page 264.

cardiagn.com
Front fog lights
Front fog lights are activated.
Steering system
For additional information, refer to
Steering system in some cases not Front fog lights, refer to page 132.
working.
Have steering system checked imme‐ High-beam Assistant
diately by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are activated and off auto‐
matically as a function of the traffic sit‐
Engine functions
uation.
Engine function disturbed. Have vehi‐ For additional information, refer to High-beam
cle checked immediately by a dealer’s Assistant, refer to page 132.
service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Automatic Hold
For additional information, refer to On-board
Diagnostics socket, refer to page 280. Function is activated. The vehicle is au‐
tomatically held in place when it is sta‐
tionary.
Green lights
For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐
Turn signal fer to page 101.

Turn signal switched on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
Blue lights
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
High beams
has failed.
For additional information, refer to Turn signal, High beams are activated.
refer to page 103.

116
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Displays Controls

For additional information, refer to High Hiding Check Control messages

beams, refer to page 103.

General lamps

Check Control
At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.

Text messages Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.

Text messages in combination with a symbol
in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐
trol message and the meaning of the indicator played continuously and are not cleared
and warning lights. until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐
eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐

cardiagn.com
Supplementary text messages sages are displayed consecutively.
Additional information, such as on the cause of These messages can be faded for approx.
an error or the required action, can be called up 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐
via Check Control. played again automatically.
With urgent messages the added text will be ▷ Other Check Control messages are faded
automatically displayed on the Control Display. automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed
Functions again later.
Depending on the Check Control message, the
Displaying stored Check Control
following functions can be selected.
messages
▷ "Owner's Manual"
About iDrive:
Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated 1. "My Vehicle"
Owner's Manual. 2. "Vehicle status"
▷ "Service request" 3. "Check Control"
Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐ 4. Select the text message.
other qualified service center or repair
shop. Messages after trip completion
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance" Special messages displayed while driving are
Contact Roadside Assistance. displayed again after the drive readiness is
switched off.

117
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Displays

Fuel gauge Further information, see Idle state, operating

and drive readiness, refer to page 19.
Instrument cluster
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary.
Engine temperature
An arrow beside the fuel pump ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
symbol shows which side of the the low temperature end.
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds.
Hints on refueling, refer to page 250.
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the
Instrument cluster with enhanced middle or in the lower half of
features the temperature display.
Vehicle tilt position may cause ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of
the display to vary. the temperature range. A Check Control

cardiagn.com
The current range is also dis‐ message is also displayed.
played as numerical value.
Check the coolant level, refer to page 277.
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler flap is on.
External temperature
Hints on refueling, refer to page 250.
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Tachometer
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
WARNING
field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐
rupted to protect the engine. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a danger of icy roads, e.g. on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is risk
Operating readiness and of an accident. Adjust your driving style to the
weather conditions at low temperatures.◀
drive readiness
The letters OFF on the tachom‐
eter indicate that the drive readi‐ Time
ness is switched off and operat‐
ing readiness is switched on. The time is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Setting the time and time format, refer to
The letters READY in the tach‐ page 38.
ometer indicate that the vehicle
is ready for driving.

118
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Displays Controls

Service requirements Symbols

The concept Sym‐ Description

bols
After switching on the drive-ready state, the in‐
strument cluster briefly displays available driv‐ No service is currently required.
ing distance or time to the next scheduled
maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current The deadline for scheduled mainte‐
service requirements from your remote con‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐
trol. tion is approaching.
Some information regarding the service re‐ The service deadline has already
quirements can also be shown on the remote passed.
control with display.

Display Entering appointment dates

cardiagn.com
Enter the dates for the required inspections.
Detailed information on service
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
requirements
set correctly.
More information on the scope of service re‐
About iDrive:
quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play. 1. "My Vehicle"
About iDrive: 2. "Vehicle status"
1. "My Vehicle" 3. "Service required"
2. "Vehicle status" 4. "Vehicle inspection"
3. "Service required" 5. "Date:"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐ 6. Select desired setting.
gally mandated inspections are displayed. 7. Confirm.
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ The entered date is stored.
tion.
Automatic Service Request
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service cen‐
ter before a service due date.
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
ter was notified.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service Request"

119
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Displays

Gear shift indicator the navigation system and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
The concept
Information
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐
cient gear for the current driving situation. WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
General information personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
tronic transmission. interfere in the respective situations.◀
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. Overview
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed. Camera

cardiagn.com
Displays

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

The camera is installed near the interior rear‐

view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
Speed limit detection terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

The concept
Switching on/off
Speed limit detection About iDrive:
Speed limit detection shows the current maxi‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
mum permitted speed in the instrument clus‐
2. "System settings"
ter. The camera in the area of the interior rear‐
view mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of 3. "Displays"
the road as well as variable overhead sign 4. "Instrument panel"
posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet 5. "INDIVIDUAL"
road conditions, etc. are also detected and
6. "Traffic sign detection Speed Limit Info"
compared with the vehicle's onboard data,
such as for the rain sensor, and will be dis‐ If speed limit detection is switched on, it is
played depending on the situation. The system shown in the instrument cluster.
takes into account the information stored in

120
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Displays Controls

Display ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

The following is displayed in the instrument ately after vehicle delivery.
cluster:

Speed limit detection Selection lists in the

Current speed limit. instrument cluster
The concept
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
Speed limit detection is not
ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
available.
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
▷ Current audio source.
▷ Redial phone feature.

cardiagn.com
Speed limit detection can also be displayed in ▷ Turn on voice activation system.
the Head-up Display.
Display
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ When signs are concealed by objects.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
▷ When driving toward bright lights.
Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
▷ When the windshield behind the interior the list in the instrument cluster can differ from
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ the illustration shown.
ered by a sticker, etc.
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
camera.
▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
system are incorrect.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
tem.
▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.

121
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Displays

Activating a list and adjusting the Information at a glance

setting Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
signal lever calls up the following information in
the instrument cluster:
▷ Miles and trip miles.
▷ Bar display for energy recovery and current
fuel consumption.
▷ Bar display for range.
▷ Average fuel consumption and average
speed.
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn ▷ Time of arrival and distance to destination.
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding When destination guidance is activated in
list. the navigation system.
Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ▷ In ECO PRO mode: bonus range.
ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel.

cardiagn.com
▷ Digital speed.

Adjusting displays for on-board

On-board computer in the computer
instrument cluster For several displays of the on-board computer,
it is possible to set whether they can be called
Display up in the instrument cluster.
The information from the on-board computer About iDrive:
is shown in the instrument cluster. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
Calling up information
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Onboard info"
6. Select desired setting.

Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.

The respective information is displayed in the
instrument cluster.

122
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Displays Controls

Information in detail Display

Odometer and trip odometer

Display

▷ Energy recovery, arrow 1.

▷ Current fuel consumption, arrow 2.
▷ Average consumption, arrow 3.
▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. Energy recovery

cardiagn.com
The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted
into electric energy during coasting (overrun)
Display/reset miles
mode. The vehicle battery is partially charged
Press the knob. and fuel consumption can be reduced.
▷ With drive readiness
switched off, time, external Current fuel consumption
temperature and odometer The current fuel consumption displays the cur‐
are displayed. rent consumption of fuel. Check whether you
▷ When drive readiness is switched on, the are currently driving in an efficient and environ‐
trip odometer is reset. mentally-friendly manner.

Range
Energy recovery and current fuel
consumption The concept

The concept Current range and total range can be displayed

as bar displays in the onboard computer.
Energy recovery and current fuel consumption
can be displayed as bar displays in the on‐ Display
board computer.

▷ Current range, arrow 1.

123
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Displays

▷ Total range, arrow 2. Resetting average values

With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. With a dynamic
driving style, e.g. taking curves aggressively,
the engine function is not always ensured.

The Check Control message appears continu‐

ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀
Time of arrival and distance to
destination
Average speed and average fuel

cardiagn.com
The concept
consumption
The estimated time of arrival and the distance
remaining to the destination are displayed if a
General information
destination is entered in the navigation system
Average speed and average fuel consumption before the trip is started. A correctly adjusted
are calculated for the distance traveled since clock is a prerequisite for a correct time of ar‐
the last reset in the onboard computer. rival.
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the
engine manually stopped are not included in Display
the calculation of the average speed.

Display

▷ Time of arrival, arrow 1.

▷ Distance to destination, arrow 2.

▷ Average speed, arrow 1.

ECO PRO bonus range
▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.
In the ECO PRO mode, the ECO PRO bonus
range, refer to page 243, can be displayed in
the instrument cluster.

124
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Displays Controls

Onboard computer on the Sport displays

Control Display
The concept
General information On the Control Display, the current values for
Two types of onboard computers are available performance and torque can be displayed if
on the Control Display: the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as
Displaying sport displays on the
often as necessary.
Control Display
▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an
About iDrive:
overview of the current trip.
1. "My Vehicle"
Calling up the onboard computer or 2. "Technology in action"
trip computer
3. "Sport displays"
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"

cardiagn.com
2. "Driving information" Speed warning
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
The concept
Displays a speed, when reached, should cause
Resetting the trip on-board computer
a warning to be issued.
About iDrive:
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
1. "My Vehicle" drops below the set speed once by at least
2. "Driving information" 3 mph/5 km/h.
3. "Trip computer"
Displaying, setting or changing the
4. ▷ "Reset": all values are reset. speed warning
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are About iDrive:
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
came to a standstill. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Resetting the fuel consumption or 3. "Speed warning"
speed
4. "Warning at:"
About iDrive:
5. Turn the controller until the desired speed
1. "My Vehicle" is displayed.
2. "Driving information" 6. Press the controller.
3. "Onboard info" Speed warning is stored.
4. "Consumption" or "Speed"
5. "OK"

125
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Displays

Activating/deactivating the speed ▷ "Engine oil level"Electronic engine

warning oil level check, refer to page 273.
About iDrive: ▷ "Check Control": Display of stored
Check Control messages, refer to
1. "My Vehicle"
page 117.
2. "Vehicle settings"
▷ "Service required"Display of service
3. "Speed warning" requirements, refer to page 119.
4. "Speed warning" ▷ "Service Request": Service request.
5. Press the controller.

Setting your current speed as the Head-up Display

speed warning
About iDrive: Overview

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"

cardiagn.com
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
5. Press the controller.
The current vehicle speed is stored as the
speed warning.

The concept
Vehicle status This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, e. g., the speed.
The concept
The driver can get information without averting
The status can be displayed and actions per‐
his or her eyes from the road.
formed for several systems.

Information
Opening the vehicle status
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
About iDrive:
up Display, refer to page 294.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status" Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Information at a glance Display is influenced by the following factors:
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": Status of the Flat ▷ Certain sitting positions.
Tire Monitor, refer to page 269. ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": Status of the play.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 265. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to ▷ Wet roads.
page 265.
▷ Unfavorable light conditions.

126
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Displays Controls

If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐ About iDrive:

tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
1. "My Vehicle"
another qualified service center or repair shop.
2. "System settings"
Switching on/off 3. "Displays"
About iDrive: 4. "Head-Up Display"
1. "My Vehicle" 5. Select desired setting.
2. "System settings" ▷ "STANDARD": all displays in the Head-
up Display are active.
3. "Displays"
▷ "REDUCED": the displays in the Head-
4. "Head-Up Display"
up Display are reduced to the absolute
5. "Head-Up Display" necessary.
▷ "INDIVIDUAL": all displays in the Head-
Display
up Display are active. Individual dis‐
plays, e.g. Check Control messages,
Overview

cardiagn.com
can be individually configured.
The following information is displayed on the
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
Head-up Display:
rently used.
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system. Setting the brightness
▷ Check Control messages. The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster. ambient brightness.

▷ Driver assistance systems. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.

Some of this information is only displayed About iDrive:

briefly as needed. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display 3. "Displays"
About iDrive: 4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
1. "My Vehicle"
6. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐
2. "System settings"
ness is set.
3. "Displays"
7. Press the controller.
4. "Head-Up Display"
When the low beams are activated, the bright‐
5. Select desired setting. ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐ ally influenced using the instrument lighting.
rently used. The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
View
Three different views are available for the
Head-up Display:

127
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Displays

Adjusting the height

About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height"
6. Turn the controller until the desired height
is reached.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.

Setting the rotation

cardiagn.com
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation"
6. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.

Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
The shape of the windshield makes it possible
to display a precise image.
A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
ages from being displayed.
For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
have the special windshield replaced by a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.

128
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Lights Controls

Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function
This chapter describes all standard, country- Automatic headlight control
specific and optional features offered with the Adaptive Light Control
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Low beams
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country Instrument lighting
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
Right roadside parking lamp

Overview

cardiagn.com
Left roadside parking lamp
Switches in the vehicle

Parking lights, cornering

lights and roadside parking
lights
General information
Position of switch: , ,
The light switch elements is located next to the If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
steering wheel. ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off at these switch
Light functions settings.

Symbol Function Parking lights

Front fog lights Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
Lights off riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
Daytime running lights and disable drive readiness.
When parking, switch on the one-sided road‐
Parking lights
side parking lamp, refer to page 130.

Low beams
Position of switch:

129
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Lights

The low beams light up when the drive-ready Headlight courtesy delay feature
state is switched on.
General information
Roadside parking lights The low beams stay lit for a particular time if
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road‐ the high beams are switched on after opera‐
side parking lamp can be switched on. tional readiness is switched on.

Press button Function

Setting the duration
Right roadside parking lamp About iDrive:
on/off
1. "My Vehicle"
Left roadside parking lamp 2. "Vehicle settings"
on/off
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "Pathway lighting"
Welcome lights and

cardiagn.com
headlight courtesy delay 6. Select desired setting.

feature
Welcome lights Automatic headlight control

General information The concept

The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
matically depending on the ambient bright‐
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
ness, e.g. in tunnels, in twilight or if there is
precipitation.
Activating/deactivating
About iDrive: General information
1. "My Vehicle" A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
2. "Vehicle settings" cause the lights to be switched on.
3. "Lighting" When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
4. "Exterior lighting"
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
5. Select desired setting:
▷ "Welcome lights" Activating
Parking lights and tail lamps are Position of switch:
switched on for a limited time. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
▷ "Door handle lighting" lights up when the low beams are switched on.
Door handles and the ground in front of
the doors are illuminated for a limited System limits
time. The automatic headlamp control cannot serve
▷ "Light carpet" as a substitute for your personal judgment of
lighting conditions.
The area next to the vehicle is illumi‐
nated for a limited time.

130
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Lights Controls

E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐
these conditions, you should always switch on er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
the lights manually. Depending on the equipment version, Adap‐
tive Light Control consists of one or several
systems:
Daytime running lights ▷ Cornering light, refer to page 131.

General information ▷ Adaptive headlight range control, refer to

page 131.
Position of switch: , ,
The daytime running lights light up when the Activating
drive-ready state is switched on. After the
Switch setting with switched-on drive-
drive-ready state is switched off, the parking
ready state.
lights light up in position .
Corner-illuminating lights
Activating/deactivating

cardiagn.com
In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or
In some countries, daytime running lights are
when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of
vate the daytime running lights.
the curve when the vehicle is moving below a
About iDrive: certain speed.
1. "My Vehicle" The turning lights are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
2. "Vehicle settings"
of turn signals.
3. "Lighting"
When driving in reverse, the turning lights may
4. "Exterior lighting" be automatically switched on regardless of the
5. Select desired setting. steering angle.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used. Self-leveling headlights
The self-leveling headlights compensate for
acceleration and braking operations in order
Adaptive Light Control not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve
optimum illumination of the roadway.
The concept
Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight Malfunction
control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ A Check Control message is displayed.
tion of the road surface. Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as
General information possible.
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
the course of the road.

131
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Lights

High-beam Assistant The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐

ment cluster lights up when the system
The concept switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic
participants early on and automatically Deactivating
switches the high beams on or off depending The High-beam Assistant can be switched off
on the traffic situation. The assistant ensures when manually switching the high beams on
that the high beams are activated whenever and off, refer to page 103. To reactivate the
the traffic situation allows. In the low speed High-beam Assistant, press the button on the
range, the high beams are not switched on by turn signal lever.
the system.
System limits
General information
The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
The system responds to light from oncoming substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to when to use the high beams. Therefore, man‐
adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. ually switch off the high beams in situations

cardiagn.com
The driver can intervene at any time and switch where required to avoid a safety risk.
the high beams on and off as usual. The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
Depending on the version of the system in the ing situations, and driver intervention may be
vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for necessary:
oncoming vehicles, but may only be dimmed in ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this such as fog or heavy precipitation.
case, the blue indicator light will stay on.
▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
Activating
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐
ence of highly reflective signs.
▷ When the windshield behind the interior
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
1. Turn the light switch to position .
2. Press and hold PC button on blinker lever.
The indicator lamp in the instrument Fog lights
cluster lights up.
Front fog lights
When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐
tomatically brightened or dimmed. General information
The low beams must be switched on before
switching on the front fog lamps.

132
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Lights Controls

Switching on/off Reading lights

Press button. The green indicator
lamp lights up.
Switching the interior lights on and off
If the automatic headlight control, refer to Press button.
page 130, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
To switch off permanently: press the button
front fog lights.
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can
activated, the front fog lights are not switched
be switched on and off independently. The
on.
button is located in the rear roofliner.

Switching the reading lamps on and

Instrument lighting off manually
The parking lights or low beams Press button.
must be switched on to adjust

cardiagn.com
the brightness.
The reading lamps are located at the front and
Adjust the brightness with the rear next to the interior lights.
thumbwheel.
Ambient light

General information
Interior lights
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
General information can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
terior.
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lamps, door handle
Switching on/off
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled. The ambient light is switched on when the ve‐
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
Overview vehicle is locked.
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
Buttons in the vehicle it will not be switched on when the vehicle is
unlocked.

Selecting color scheme

About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
Interior lights 5. "Color"
6. Select desired setting.

133
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Lights

Setting the brightness If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will
About iDrive: be switched off.

1. "My Vehicle" Setting the brightness

2. "Vehicle settings" About iDrive:
3. "Lighting"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Interior lighting"
2. "Vehicle settings"
5. "Brightness"
3. "Lighting"
6. Select desired setting.
4. "Bowers & Wilkins"

Dimmed when driving 5. "Brightness"

About iDrive: 6. Select desired setting.

1. "My Vehicle" BMW Touch Command

2. "Vehicle settings" The operation of the Bowers & Wilkins high-

cardiagn.com
3. "Lighting" end surround sound system is also possible
4. "Interior lighting" with BMW Touch Command.

5. "Dimmed while driving"

Ambient light accent
The interior lighting is dimmed for some lights
while driving. General information
The ambient light accent illuminates the door
Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting pillar in the rear.
If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the
sliding visor closed, lighting of the panoramic Switching on/off
glass sunroof is switched off. The ambient light accent is switched on when
When closing the sliding visors, only the light‐ the vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when
ing for the area in question is switched off. the vehicle is locked.
When opening a rear door, the ambient light
BMW Touch Command accent of the respective door pillar is switched
The ambient light can also be operated using off.
BMW Touch Command.
Setting the brightness
Bowers & Wilkins High End Surround About iDrive:
Sound System
1. "My Vehicle"
General information 2. "Vehicle settings"
Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. 3. "Lighting"
Brightness can be individually set.
4. "Accent lighting in rear"

Switching on/off 5. "Brightness"

The speaker lighting is switched on when the The last brightness set is displayed.
vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the 6. Select desired setting.
vehicle is locked.

134
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Lights Controls

Touch sensor
The ambient light accent is fitted with a touch
sensor. The ambient highlight is switched on
or off with a brief touch of the chrome bar. The
brightness is changed with a long touch.

BMW Touch Command

The ambient highlight can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.

cardiagn.com

135
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

Safety
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Airbags

1
2
Front airbag, driver
Front airbag, front passenger
4
5
Side airbag
Knee airbag
cardiagn.com
3 Head airbag

Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and front In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
passenger by responding to frontal impacts in side of the body in the chest and lap area.
which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐
equate restraint. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.

136
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

Ejection Mitigation ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front

The head airbag system is designed as an passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS
through side windows during rollovers or side devices or' mobile phones.
impact events. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
Knee airbag modify them in any way.
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
impact. other objects on the front passenger seat
that are not specifically suited for seats
Protective action with integrated side airbags.
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end jackets, over the backrests.
collisions. ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.

cardiagn.com
Information for optimum effect of the This also applies to steering wheel covers,
airbags the dashboard, and the seats.
WARNING ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ Even when you follow all instructions very
ployment area of the airbags is impacted, the closely, injury from contact with the airbags
airbag system cannot protect as intended or cannot be ruled out in certain situations.
cause additional injuries due to triggering. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Ob‐ short-term and, in most cases, temporary
serve the Information for optimum protective hearing impairment in sensitive individuals.
effect of the airbag system.◀
Warnings and information on the airbags are
▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. also found on the sun visors.
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the Functional readiness of the airbag
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep system
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ Information
gered. WARNING
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ Individual components can be hot after
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and triggering of the airbag system. There is risk of
legs in the floor area. injuries. Do not touch individual components.◀
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag. WARNING
▷ There should be no persons, animals or Improperly executed work can lead to
objects between an airbag and a person. failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
tion, the airbag system could not trigger as in‐
the front passenger side as a storage area.
tended in the event of an accident despite re‐

137
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

spective accident severity. There is risk of Malfunction of the automatic

injuries or danger to life. Have the airbag sys‐ deactivation system
tem checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap‐ When transporting older children and adults,
ped by a dealer’s service center or another the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
qualified service center or repair shop.◀ tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger
Correct function airbags lights up.
When drive readiness is switched on, In this case, change the sitting position so that
the warning lamp in the instrument the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
cluster lights up briefly and thereby in‐ and the indicator lamp goes out.
dicates the function readiness of the entire air‐ If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
bag system and the belt tensioners. the person sit in the rear.
To enable correct recognition of the occupied
Airbag system malfunctioning seat cushion
▷ Warning lamp does not come on when ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats

cardiagn.com
drive readiness is switched on. or other items to the front passenger seat
▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger
seat.
Automatic deactivation of the front-
seat passenger airbags ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
passenger seat if a child restraint system is
The concept to be installed on it.
The system reads if the front passenger seat is ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ could press against the seat from below.
sistance. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐
senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ Indicator lamp for the front-seat
vated. passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐
Information ger airbag in the roofliner indicates the operat‐
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ ing state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐
structions for children on the front passenger ther activated or deactivated.
seat, see Children.
After drive readiness is switched on, the lamp
WARNING briefly lights up and then indicates whether the
The ensure the front-seat passenger air‐ airbags are either activated or deactivated.
bag function, it must be detected, whether a ▷ The indicator lamp lights up
person occupies the front passenger seat. The when a child is properly
entire seat cushion area must be used for this seated in a child restraint fix‐
purpose. There is risk of injuries or danger to ing system or when the seat
life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps is empty. The airbags on the
his or her feet in the floor area.◀ front passenger side are not
activated.

138
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, The calibration procedure is completed when
e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient the message on the Control Display disap‐
size is detected on the seat. The airbags pears.
on the front passenger side are activated. If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
peat the calibration.
Detected child seats If the message does not disappear after a re‐
The system generally detects children seated peat calibration, have the system checked as
in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ soon as possible.
quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐
factured. After installing a child seat, make
sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat Intelligent Safety
passenger airbags lights up. This indicates
that the child seat has been detected and the The concept
front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
the driver assistance system. Depending on
Strength of the driver's and front-seat how the vehicle is equipped, Intelligent Safety

cardiagn.com
passenger airbag consists of one or more systems that can help
The explosive power that activates driver's/ prevent a imminent collision.
front passenger's airbags very much depends ▷ Front-end collision warning with braking
on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ function, refer to page 140.
er's seat.
▷ Pedestrian warning with City Braking func‐
With a respective message appearing on Con‐ tion, refer to page 144.
trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep
▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal
the accuracy of this function over the long-
detection, refer to page 147.
term.
▷ Lane departure warning, refer to
Calibrating the front seats page 150.
▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
WARNING
page 153.
There is risk of jamming when moving
▷ Side collision warning, refer to page 156.
the seats. There is risk of injuries or risk of
property damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐ Information
justment.◀ WARNING
A corresponding message appears on the Indicators and warnings do not relieve
Control Display. from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
1. Press the switch and move the respective may not be output or they may be output too
seat all the way forward. late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
still moves forward slightly. tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. fere in the respective situations.◀

139
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

WARNING Press button:

Due to system limits, individual functions The menu for the intelligent safety
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing system is displayed.
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐ off, all systems are now switched on.
ing function. There is risk of an accident.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tow-starting/towing.◀
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
Overview profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
Button in the vehicle are activated, the button lights up orange.

Press button repeatedly. It is switched

between the following settings:
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are

cardiagn.com
switched on. For the sub-functions, e.g. set‐
ting for warning time, basic settings are acti‐
vated.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
Intelligent Safety settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.
Switching on/off
Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ Press and hold this button:
cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐ All Intelligent Safety systems are
gent Safety systems activate according to the turned off.
last setting.

Press Status
button Collision warning with
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐ braking function
gent Safety systems are
switched on. The concept
The system can help prevent accidents. If an
Button lights up orange: some In‐ accident cannot be prevented, the system will
telligent Safety systems are help reduce the collision speed.
switched off or settings for the
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
sub-functions were changed.
nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐
Button does not light up: all Intel‐ ently if needed.
ligent Safety systems are The system is controlled using a camera.
switched off.
If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
Control with Stop & Go function, ACC, the

140
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

front-end collision warning is additionally con‐ WARNING

trolled via the cruise control radar sensor. Due to system limits, individual functions
Active Protection: if a collision seems to be un‐ can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
avoidable, PreCrash functions are triggered. with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
The front-end collision warning is available e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐
even if cruise control has been deactivated. ing function. There is risk of an accident.
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle
tow-starting/towing.◀
intentionally, the collision warning and braking
are delayed in order to avoid false system re‐
actions. Overview

General information Button in the vehicle

The system issues a two-phase warning of a
possible danger of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐

cardiagn.com
uation.

Detection range

Intelligent Safety

Camera

It responds to objects if they are detected by

the system.

Information
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐ view mirror.
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
may not be output or they may be output too
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀

141
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

With Active Cruise Control: radar "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
sensor are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.

Press and hold this button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.

Press Status
The radar sensor is located in the lower area of button
the front bumper. Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ gent Safety systems are
structed. switched on.

cardiagn.com
Button lights up orange: some In‐
Switching on/off telligent Safety systems are
switched off or settings for the
Switching on automatically sub-functions were changed.
The system is automatically active after every
Button does not light up: all Intel‐
driving-off.
ligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button:
Setting the warning time
The menu for the intelligent safety About iDrive:
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched 1. "My Vehicle"
off, all systems are now switched on. 2. "Vehicle settings"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the 3. "Intelligent Safety"
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ 4. "Frontal Collision Warning"
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
5. Select desired setting.
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu rently used.
are activated, the button lights up orange.
Warning with braking function
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
between the following settings: Display
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐
switched on. Basic settings are activated for nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐
the subfunctions. ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display.

142
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

Symbol Measure The braking intervention takes place up to ap‐

prox. 50 mph/80 km/h.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.
The braking intervention is executed only if
Brake and increase distance. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.

Symbol flashes red and an acoustic The braking intervention can be interrupted by
signal sounds: acute warning. stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
You are requested to intervene by
braking or make an evasive maneu‐ Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
ver. of the detection range and functional restric‐
tions are to be considered.

Prewarning With radar sensor and Active Cruise

This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the Control: braking intervention
impending danger of a collision or the distance The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to the vehicle ahead is too small. to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
The driver must intervene actively when there ing force is used when the brake is actuated.

cardiagn.com
is a prewarning. Premise is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal.
Acute warning with braking function The system can assist with automatic braking
Acute warning in displayed in case of the immi‐ intervention if there is risk of a collision.
nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ The intervention can bring the vehicle to a
proaches another object at a relatively high dif‐ complete stop.
ferential speed.
The braking intervention is executed only if
The driver must intervene actively when there DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking
assisted by an automatic braking intervention
intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure.
in a possible risk of collision.
No automatic delay occurs.
Acute warnings can also be triggered without
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
previous forewarning.
stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
Brake intervention, City braking
function Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
tions are to be considered.
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐
ing force is used when the brake is actuated.
System limits
Premise is sufficiently quick and hard stepping
on the brake pedal.
Detection range
The system can additionally assist possibly
The system's detection potential is limited.
with automatic braking intervention if there is
risk of a collision. Thus a system reaction might not come or
might come late.
At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated
to a complete stop. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
tected:

143
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach lision with pedestrians and includes a braking
them at high speed. function.
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of The camera in the area of the rearview mirror
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. controls the system.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. Active Protection: if a collision seems to be un‐
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. avoidable, PreCrash functions are triggered.

Functional limitations General information

The system may not be fully functional in the The system warns of possible collisions with
following situations: pedestrians at speeds from ap‐
prox. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and supports you with a
fall.
braking intervention shortly before a collision.
▷ In tight curves.
Under those circumstances it reacts to people
▷ If the driving stability control systems are who are within the detection range of the sys‐
limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. tem.

cardiagn.com
▷ If the area of the front windshield in front of
the interior mirror is dirty or covered. Detection range
▷ Depending on equipment, if the radar sen‐
sor is dirty or obscured.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas
Warning sensitivity
The more sensitive the warning settings are, ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are vehicle.
displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
cess of premature warnings. left.
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐
cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
Pedestrian warning with City sued about pedestrians who are located within
braking function the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
The concept
The system can help prevent accidents with
pedestrians.
The system issues a warning in the city driving
speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐

144
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

Information Camera
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
from the personal responsibility. Due to sys‐
tem limits, warnings or reactions of the system
may not be output or they may be output too
late or incorrectly. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic closely and actively inter‐
fere in the respective situations.◀
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
WARNING view mirror.
Due to system limits, individual functions Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated,
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐

cardiagn.com
ing function. There is risk of an accident. Switching on/off
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to
tow-starting/towing.◀ Switching on automatically
The system is automatically active after every
Overview driving-off.

Button in the vehicle Switching on/off manually

Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
Intelligent Safety profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated, the button lights up orange.

Press button repeatedly. It is switched

between the following settings:
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.

145
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐ The braking intervention is executed only if
dividually switched off. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on.
The braking intervention can be interrupted by
Press and hold this button: stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
All Intelligent Safety systems are tively moving the steering wheel.
turned off. Object detection can be restricted. Limitations
of the detection range and functional restric‐
Press Status tions are to be considered.
button

Button lights up green: all Intelli‐ System limits

gent Safety systems are
switched on. Detection range
The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
Button lights up orange: some In‐
ited.
telligent Safety systems are
switched off or settings for the Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐
sued late.

cardiagn.com
sub-functions were changed.
E. g. the following situations may not be de‐
Button does not light up: all Intel‐
tected:
ligent Safety systems are
switched off. ▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of the viewing angle or contour.
Warning with braking function
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
Display ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
If a collision with a person detected in this way 32 in/80 cm.
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. Functional limitations
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ The system may not be fully functional or may
nal sounds. not be available in the following situations:
▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐
Intervene immediately by braking or make an fall.
evasive maneuver. ▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
Braking intervention
deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF.
The warning prompts the driver himself/herself
to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front
ing force is used when the brake is actuated. windshield are dirty or covered.
Premise for the brake booster is sufficiently ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
quick and hard stepping on the brake pedal. gine, via the Start/Stop button.
The system can additionally assist with braking ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
intervention if there is risk of a collision. ately after vehicle delivery.
At low speeds the vehicle can be decelerated
to a complete stop.

146
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐ ent light, the image is only displayed when the
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low beams are activated.
low in the sky. A still image is displayed at regular intervals for
▷ When it is dark outside. a fraction of a second.

Pedestrian and animal detection

Night Vision with pedestrian
and animal detection
The concept
Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐
tion is a night vision system.
An infrared camera scans the area in front of
the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects
pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm
Object detection and warning only functions in

cardiagn.com
objects that are similar in shape to human be‐
ings or animals are detected by the system. If darkness.
necessary, the heat image can be displayed on Objects whose form is similar to people with
the Control Display. sufficient heat radiation are detected.
In addition, the system also detects animals
Heat image above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer.
Display on the Control Display with heat image
activated:
▷ People detected by the system: in light
yellow.
▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark
yellow.

Range of object detection, with good ambient

conditions:
The image shows the heat radiated by objects
▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx.
in the field of view of the camera.
330 ft/100 m
Warm objects have a light appearance and
▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx.
cold objects a dark appearance.
490 ft/150 m
The ability to detect an object depends on the
▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐
temperature difference between the object
prox. 230 ft/70 m
and the background and on the level of heat
radiation emitted by the object. Objects that Environmental influences can limit the availa‐
are similar in temperature to the environment bility of object detection.
or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐ If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is
tect. located in a residential area, the animal detec‐
tion is temporarily switched off.
For safety reasons, when driving at speeds
above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐

147
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

Information Camera
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀

Overview
The camera is automatically heated when the
Buttons in the vehicle external temperatures are low.
The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐
gether with the headlights.

Switching on/off

cardiagn.com
Switching on automatically
When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐
ically active after every driving-off.

Switching on heat image additionally

Intelligent Safety
The heat image from the Night Vision camera
can also be displayed on the Control Display.
This function has no effect on object detec‐
tion.
Press button.

The image from the camera is displayed on the

Control Display.

Set heat image via iDrive

Switch on/switch off heat image With heat image switched on:

1. Select brightness or contrast.

▷ "Brightness".
▷ "Contrast".
2. Set the desired value.

148
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

Display Symbols

Warning of people or animals in Symbol Meaning

danger
Pedestrian warning
If a collision with a person or an animal de‐
tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐
bol appears on the instrument cluster and in Animal warning
the Head-up Display.
Although both the shape and the heat radiation
are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled Symbol lights Advance warning: intervene
out. up red. actively by braking or mak‐
ing an evasive maneuver
Warning area in front of the vehicle
Symbol flashes Acute warning: intervene
red and a signal immediately by braking or
sounds. making an evasive maneu‐

cardiagn.com
ver.

The displayed symbol shows the side of the

road on which the person or animal was de‐
tected.

Prewarning
The warning area for the pedestrian warning
Prewarning for persons is displayed when a
consists of two parts:
person is detected in the central area immedi‐
▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the ately in front of the vehicle as well as on the left
vehicle. or right side in the extended area.
▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and Prewarning for animals is displayed when an
left. animal is detected in the front of the vehicle.
With animal warnings, no distinction is made The driver must intervene actively when there
between the central or expanded area. is a prewarning.
The entire area moves along with the vehicle in
the direction of the steering angle and changes Acute warning
with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed Acute warning is displayed if a person or an
increases, the area becomes longer and wider, animal is detected in direct proximity if front of
e.g. the vehicle.
The driver must immediately intervene actively
when there is an acute warning.
Active Protection: if a collision seems to be un‐
avoidable, PreCrash functions are triggered.

149
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

Display in the Head-up Display Lane departure warning

The warning is displayed simultaneously in the
Head-up Display and on the instrument clus‐ The concept
ter. This system alerts at speeds be‐
tween 45 mph/70 km/h and 130 mph/210 km/h
System limits when the vehicle on roads with lane markings
is about to leave the lane.
Basic limits
The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in
System operation is limited in situations such the event of warnings. The time of the warning
as the following: may vary depending on the current driving sit‐
▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in uation.
tight curves. The system does not provide a warning if the
▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
glass is damaged. Vehicles with side collision warning: if the vi‐
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. brating steering wheel is ignored and the lane

cardiagn.com
▷ At very high external temperatures. marking crossed, the system intervenes with a
brief active steering intervention and helps to
Limits of pedestrian and animal maintain the vehicle in the lane.
detection
Information
In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐
trians are detected as animals or animals as WARNING
pedestrians. The system does not relieve from the
Small animals are not detected by the object personal responsibility to correctly assess
detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐ route and traffic situation. There is risk of an
ble in the image. accident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
Limited detection, e.g. in the following circum‐
interfere in the respective situations. In the
stances:
event of a warning, do not unnecessarily jerk
▷ People or animals who are fully or partially the steering wheel.◀
covered, especially when their heads are
covered.
Overview
▷ People who are not in an upright position,
e.g., lying down. Button in the vehicle
▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g.,
recumbent bicycles).
▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g.,
after an accident.

No display on the rear screen

The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐
played on the rear screen.

150
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

Intelligent Safety "ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are

switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.
Camera "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐
dividually switched off.

Press and hold this button:

All Intelligent Safety systems are
turned off.

The camera is installed near the interior rear‐ Press Status

view mirror. button
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐

cardiagn.com
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear. gent Safety systems are
switched on.
Switching on/off Button lights up orange: some In‐
telligent Safety systems are
Switching on automatically switched off or settings for the
The lane departure warning is automatically sub-functions were changed.
activated after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐ Button does not light up: all Intel‐
ped. ligent Safety systems are
switched off.
Switching on/off manually
Press button: Setting warning sensitivities
The menu for the intelligent safety About iDrive:
system is displayed. 1. "My Vehicle"
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched 2. "Vehicle settings"
off, all systems are now switched on.
3. "Intelligent Safety"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
4. "Lane Departure Warning"
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐ 5. Select desired setting.
vidual settings are activated and stored for the ▷ "Always": the system always alerts
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is within the technical limitations.
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu ▷ "Reduced": some warning are sup‐
are activated, the button lights up orange. pressed depending on the situation,
e.g. during passing without turn signal
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
or when purposefully driving over lane
between the following settings:
markings in curves.
▷ "Off": no warnings are issued.

151
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

The selected setting is stored for the drive pro‐ brief active steering intervention and helps to
file currently used. maintain the vehicle in the lane. The steering
intervention can be noticed on the steering
Set force of the steering wheel wheel and can be manually overridden at any
vibration time.
About iDrive:
End of warning
1. "My Vehicle"
The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
2. "Vehicle settings" tions:
3. "Steering wheel vibration" ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds.
4. Select desired setting. ▷ When returning to your own lane.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety ▷ When braking hard.
systems and stored for the profile currently
▷ When using the turn signal.
used.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
Vehicles with side collision warning:

cardiagn.com
switching steering intervention on/off System limits
The steering intervention can be switched on
Functional limitations
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐
tion and lane departure warning. The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
About iDrive:
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
2. "Vehicle settings" ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
3. "Intelligent Safety" markings such as in construction areas.
4. "Steering intervention" ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
The selected setting is stored for the drive pro‐ ice, dirt or water.
file currently used. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
Display in the instrument cluster objects.
Green symbol: at least one lane mark‐ ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
ing was detected and warnings can be front of you.
issued. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
Issued warning low in the sky.
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
brating. ered with stickers, etc.
If the turn signal is set before changing the ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
lane, a warning is not issued. ately after vehicle delivery.
Vehicles with side collision warning: if the vi‐ A Check Control message is displayed when
brating steering wheel is ignored and the lane the system is not fully functional.
marking crossed, the system intervenes with a

152
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

Warning sensitivity Information

The more sensitive the warning settings are, WARNING
the more warnings are displayed. However,
The system does not relieve from the
there may also be an excess of undesired
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
warnings.
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
Active Blind Spot Detection interfere in the respective situations.◀

The concept
Overview

Button in the vehicle

cardiagn.com
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle starting
from a preset minimum speed.
Intelligent Safety
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
systems.
Radar sensors
The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The lamp in the exterior mirror is dimmed.

Before you change lanes after setting the turn

signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
Vehicles with side collision warning: at speeds
bumper.
between 45 mph/70 km/h and
130 mph/210 km/h, the system can intervene Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
with a brief active steering intervention and dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
help to return the vehicle into the lane.

153
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

Switching on/off Press Status

button
Switching on automatically
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐
gent Safety systems are
cally activated after departure, if the function
switched on.
was switched on the last time the engine was
stopped. Button lights up orange: some In‐
telligent Safety systems are
Switching on/off manually switched off or settings for the
Press button: sub-functions were changed.

The menu for the intelligent safety Button does not light up: all Intel‐
system is displayed. ligent Safety systems are
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched switched off.
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the Setting the warning time

cardiagn.com
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ About iDrive:
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the 1. "My Vehicle"
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is 2. "Vehicle settings"
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu 3. "Intelligent Safety"
are activated, the button lights up orange.
4. "Blind Spot Detection"
Press button repeatedly. It is switched 5. Select desired setting.
between the following settings: "Off": With this setting, no warning is out‐
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are put.
switched on. Basic settings are activated for The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
the subfunctions. rently used.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems
are switched on according to the individual Set force of the steering wheel
settings. vibration
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐ About iDrive:
dividually switched off.
1. "My Vehicle"
Press and hold this button: 2. "Vehicle settings"
All Intelligent Safety systems are 3. "Steering wheel vibration"
turned off. 4. Select desired setting.
The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety
systems and stored for the profile currently
used.

154
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

Vehicles with side collision warning: noticed on the steering wheel and can be man‐
switching steering intervention on/off ually overridden at any time.
The steering intervention can be switched on The warning stops when the turn signal is
and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐ switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
tion and lane departure warning. critical zone.
About iDrive:
Brief flashing of the lamp
1. "My Vehicle"
A brief flashing of the lamp during vehicle un‐
2. "Vehicle settings" locking serves as system self-test.
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Steering intervention" System limits
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
Functional limitations
rently used.
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
Issued warning
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed

cardiagn.com
Lamp in the exterior mirror much faster than your own.
▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
For vehicles with side collision warning, the
steering intervention can be limited e.g. in the
following situation:
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
Information stage markings such as in construction areas.

The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror indi‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot ice, dirt or water.
or approaching from behind. ▷ When the lane markings are not white.
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
WARNING objects.
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly front of you.
and the lamp in the exterior mirror flashes
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
brightly.
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
Vehicles with side collision warning: it at low in the sky.
speeds between 45 mph/70 km/h and
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
130 mph/210 km/h the vibrating steering
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
wheel is ignored and the lane marking crossed,
ered with stickers, etc.
the system intervenes with a brief active steer‐
ing intervention and helps to return the vehicle ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
into the lane. The steering intervention can be ately after vehicle delivery.

155
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

A Check Control message is displayed when Side collision warning

the system is not fully functional.
The concept
Displaying warnings
Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g. warning time, more warnings can be dis‐
played. However, there may also be an excess
of premature warnings of critical vehicles.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
The system helps to avoid imminent side colli‐
erned by the following:
sions.
FCC ID:
Four radar sensors in the bumpers monitor the
▷ NBG009014A.

cardiagn.com
area next to the vehicle in the speed range
Compliance statement: from approx. 45 mph/70 km/h to ap‐
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC prox. 130 mph/210 km/h.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following The front camera determines the lane marking
two conditions: positions.
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ If e.g. another vehicle is detected next to the
ference, and vehicle and if there is a danger of collision with
▷ this device must accept any interference this vehicle, the system helps the driver to
received, including interference that may avoid the collision via steering intervention.
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to Information
these devices could void the user's authority to WARNING
operate this equipment.
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀

Functional requirements
A prerequisite for activating the side collision
warning with steering intervention is that the
camera detects the lane markings.

156
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

Overview Camera

Button in the vehicle

The camera is installed near the interior rear‐

view mirror.
Intelligent Safety Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Radar sensors

cardiagn.com
Switching on/off
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.
Switching on automatically
The side collision warning is automatically acti‐
vated after departure, if the function was
switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
ped.

Switching on/off manually

Press button:
The menu for the intelligent safety
Front side bumper.
system is displayed.
If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on.
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐
tems can be individually configured. The indi‐
vidual settings are activated and stored for the
profile currently used. As soon as a setting is
changed on the menu, all settings of the menu
are activated, the button lights up orange.
Rear bumper.
Press button repeatedly. It is switched
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
between the following settings:
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
"ALL ON" All Intelligent Safety systems are
switched on. Basic settings are activated for
the subfunctions.

157
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems steering wheel and can be manually overridden
are switched on according to the individual at any time.
settings.
Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be in‐ System limits
dividually switched off. The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
Press and hold this button: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
All Intelligent Safety systems are much faster than your own.
turned off. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

Press Status ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.

button ▷ If the bumpers are dirty or iced up, or cov‐
ered with stickers.
Button lights up green: all Intelli‐
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐
gent Safety systems are
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane
switched on.
markings such as in construction areas.

cardiagn.com
Button lights up orange: some In‐ ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
telligent Safety systems are ice, dirt or water.
switched off or settings for the
▷ When the lane markings are covered by
sub-functions were changed.
objects.
Button does not light up: all Intel‐ ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
ligent Safety systems are front of you.
switched off.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
Issued warning low in the sky.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
Lamp in the exterior mirror rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐
ered with stickers, etc.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
A Check Control message is displayed when
the system is not fully functional.

For US owners only

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
WARNING
erned by the following:
The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes and the
steering wheel vibrates. An active steering in‐ FCC ID:
tervention takes place to prevent collisions and ▷ NBG009014A.
maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The Compliance statement:
steering intervention can be noticed on the

158
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Information

Rules. Operation is subject to the following
WARNING
two conditions:
The system does not relieve from the
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
ference, and
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
▷ this device must accept any interference cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
received, including interference that may conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
cause undesired operation. interfere in the respective situations.◀
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to
these devices could void the user's authority to Overview
operate this equipment.
Radar sensors

Rear collision prevention

The concept

cardiagn.com
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper.
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
System limits
If a vehicle approaches from the rear at a cer‐
tain speed, the system responds as follows: The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ Active Protection: if a collision seems to be
unavoidable, PreCrash functions are trig‐ ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
gered. much faster than your own.
The system is automatically active after every ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
driving-off. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
The system is deactivated in the following sit‐ ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
uations: with stickers.
▷ If reverse gear is engaged
For US owners only
▷ If the trailer power socket is in use, e.g.
during operation with trailer or bicycle rack The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
erned by the following:
FCC ID:

159
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

▷ NBG009014A. General information

Compliance statement: Active Protection consists of various PreCrash
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC functions, which can vary depending on the
Rules. Operation is subject to the following equipment.
two conditions: The system is used to detect certain critical
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ driving situations that might lead to an acci‐
ference, and dent. Critical driving situations are:

▷ this device must accept any interference ▷ Emergency stop.

received, including interference that may ▷ Severe understeering.
cause undesired operation. ▷ Severe oversteering.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to Certain functions of several systems can -
these devices could void the user's authority to within the system limits - lead to Active Pro‐
operate this equipment. tection triggering:
▷ Collision warning with braking function: de‐
tection of imminent front collisions or auto‐

cardiagn.com
Brake force display matic braking intervention.

The concept ▷ Collision warning with braking function or

Night Vision with Dynamic Marker Light:
brake booster.
▷ Rear collision prevention: detection of im‐
minent rear collisions.

Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐
▷ During normal brake application, the outer its, critical situation could not be detected reli‐
brake lights light up. ably or in time. There is risk of an accident. Ad‐
just the driving style to the traffic conditions.
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
Watch traffic closely and actively interfere in
brake lights light up in addition.
the respective situations.◀

Function
Active Protection When the belt is closed, the driver's and pas‐
senger's belt straps are automatically tight‐
The concept
ened once after driving away.
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
In accident-critical situations, the following in‐
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
dividual functions become active as needed:
or collision situations.
▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐
sioned.
▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow
gap.

160
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Safety Controls

▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐ ▷ By pressing the brake pedal.
cluding sliding visor. ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort seats
in the front: automatic positioning of the
backrest for the front passenger seat. Attentiveness assistant
▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort seats
in the rear: automatic positioning of the The concept
backrests for the rear passenger seats. The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐
After a critical driving situation without an acci‐ ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐
dent, the front belts are loosened again. All notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this
other systems can be restored to the desired situation, it is recommended that the driver
setting. takes a break.
If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐
cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt Information
using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the WARNING
belt before continuing on your trip.

cardiagn.com
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
Post Crash — iBrake alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not
be detected in time. There is risk of an acci‐
The concept dent. Make sure that the driver is rested and
In certain accident situations, e.g. collision, the alert. Adjust the driving style to the traffic con‐
system can bring the vehicle to a halt automat‐ ditions.◀
ically without driver intervention. This can re‐
duce the risk of a further collision and the con‐ Function
sequences thereof.
The system is switched on each time drive
readiness is switched on.
At standstill
After travel has begun, the system is trained
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
about the driver, so that increasing lack of
automatically.
alertness or fatigue can be detected.

Harder vehicle braking This procedure takes the following criteria into
account:
It can be necessary to bring the vehicle in cer‐
tain situations to a halt quicker. ▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐
ior.
Here, a higher braking pressure must be gen‐
erated for a short period when pressing the ▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip.
brake pedal than during automatic braking. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
This interrupts automatic braking. system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Interrupting automatic braking
It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations,e.g. for an evasive
maneuver.
Interrupt automatic braking:

161
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Safety

Break recommendation ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below

about 43 mph/70 km/h.
Switching on/off, adjusting ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
The Attentiveness Assistant is active automat‐ rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
ically with each switching on of drive readiness ▷ In active driving situations, such as when
and can thus display a break recommendation. changing lanes frequently.
The break recommendation can also be ▷ When the road surface is poor.
switched on or off via iDrive and adjusted:
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Driver attention control"
4. Select desired setting.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is

cardiagn.com
made.
▷ "Standard": the break recommendation
is made with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation
is issued earlier.

Display
If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or
fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control
Display with the recommendation to take a
break.
During the display, the following settings can
be selected:
▷ "Do not ask again"
▷ "Places to stop"
▷ "Remind me later"
The break recommendation is repeated af‐
ter 20 minutes.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.

System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance, and will either output
an incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.

162
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving stability control systems Controls

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Drive-off assistant
This chapter describes all standard, country- This system supports driving off on inclines.
specific and optional features offered with the The parking brake is not required.
series. It also describes features that are not
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
brake.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
systems. The respectively applicable country out delay.
provisions must be observed when using the After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
respective features and systems. held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
The possible holding duration amounts to
2 minutes.
Anti-lock Braking System

cardiagn.com
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
ABS is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking.
The vehicle contains its steering power even DSC Dynamic Stability
during full brake applications, thus increasing Control
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐
The concept
gine. DSC prevents traction loss in the power
wheels when driving off and accelerating.
DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐
Brake assistant tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within
the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
cle on a steady course by reducing engine
automatically produces the greatest possible
speed and by applying brakes to the individual
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐
wheels.
tance to a minimum during emergency stop.
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided
Information
by ABS.
Adapt your driving style to the situation, for an
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
appropriate driving style is always the respon‐
for the duration of the emergency stop.
sibility of the driver.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not
even with DSC.
Adaptive brake assistant
Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety
In combination with the Active Cruise Control, margin by driving in a risky manner.
this system ensures that the brakes respond
even more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐
uations.

163
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving stability control systems

WARNING Deactivating DSC

When driving with roof load, e.g. with Hold the button down until the DSC
roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety may OFF indicator lamp is displayed in the
not be ensured in driving-critical situations due instrument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed.
to the elevated center of gravity. There is risk
The DSC system is switched off.
of accidents or risk of property damage. Do not
deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC The steering and, depending on the equip‐
when driving with roof load.◀ ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving.

Overview Activating DSC

Press button.
Button in the vehicle
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lights

cardiagn.com
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is
deactivated.

DSC OFF
DTC Dynamic Traction
Indicator/warning lights Control
The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ The concept
trols the drive and braking forces.
The DTC system is a version of the DSC where
The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has forward momentum is optimized.
failed.
The system ensures maximum headway on
special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
Deactivating/activating DSC e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is what limited driving stability.
reduced during acceleration and when driving Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
in curves. provides maximum traction. Driving stability is
Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active limited during acceleration and when driving in
Steering system are only performed by the curves.
rear axle steering. Therefore drive with appropriate caution.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
again as soon as possible. under the following special circumstances:
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.

164
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving stability control systems Controls

▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or xDrive

driving off from loose grounds.
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the ve‐
▷ When driving with snow chains.
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
Overview
The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐
tributes the drive forces to the front and rear
Button in the vehicle
axles as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.

HDC Hill Descent Control

The concept
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐
matically controls vehicle speed on steep

cardiagn.com
downhill gradients. Without applying the
DSC OFF brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than
walking speed.
Hill Descent Control can be activated at
Indicator/warning lights speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When
If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed
the instrument cluster. to approx. walking speed and then keeps its
speed constant.
The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐
namic Traction Control is activated. As long as there is active braking, the system
is on standby. The system does not brake the
vehicle during this time.
Activating/deactivating DTC
Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever
position D or R.
Activating DTC
Press button. Increasing or decreasing vehicle
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ speed
ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐
OFF lights up. prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h
using the rocker switch of the cruise control on
the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be
Deactivating DTC
changed by lightly accelerating.
Press button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor lamp go out.

165
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving stability control systems

Deactivating HDC
Press button again and the LED goes
out. HDC is automatically deactivated
above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Display in the instrument cluster

Status display
▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of A symbol and the selected de‐
resistance: the speed increases gradually. sired speed are displayed.
▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point The desired speed is hidden af‐
of resistance: the speed increases while ter a brief time.
the rocker switch is pressed. With a change of the desired
▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point speed via the rocker switch on the steering
of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐ wheel, it is displayed briefly.

cardiagn.com
ally.
▷ Press the rocker switch down past the Desired speed
point of resistance: when driving forward,
Display in the speedometer:
the speed decreases to approx.
6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed ▷ Green marking: system is
decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h. active.
▷ Marking is orange/white: the
Overview system has been paused.
▷ No marking: system is
Button in the vehicle switched off.

Malfunction
A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐
ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated
brake temperatures.

Integral Active Steering

HDC The concept
Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐
tive Steering and rear axle steering.
Activating HDC
The system varies the steering angle of the
Press button. The LED above the button wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐
lights up. ment.

166
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving stability control systems Controls

With strong steering movements and low

speeds, e.g. when parking, the wheel angle is
magnified, that is, the steering is more direct.
The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐
verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in
a direction opposite to the front wheels.
At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in
the same direction as the front wheels.
In critical driving situations, the Integral Active
Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐
poseful steering of the rear wheels before the
driver intervenes, e.g. in case of oversteering.

General information
The system offers several different tunings.

cardiagn.com
These are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
to page 110.

Tuning

Drive mode Integral Active Steering

COMFORT/E comfortable, for optimal

CO PRO travel comfort

SPORT dynamic, for greater agility

Using snow chains

Information
When snow chains are in use, refer to
page 264, rear wheel steering is deactivated.

Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the steering
wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle
responds more sensitively to steering wheel
movements in the higher speed range.
The stability-enhancing intervention may be
deactivated.
Proceed cautiously and drive defensively.
Have the system checked.

167
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and options As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐
erates to the desired speed.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Vehicles driving ahead are captured by a radar
specific and optional features offered with the
sensor and a camera.
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
General information
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and Depending on the driving settings, the features
systems. The respectively applicable country of the cruise control can change in certain
provisions must be observed when using the areas.
respective features and systems. The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
Active Cruise Control with

cardiagn.com
Due to the driving style that minimizes fuel
Stop & Go function, ACC consumption in ECO PRO drive mode, the ve‐
hicle may drop below the set desired speed in
The concept some situations, e.g. on uphill grades.
Use this system to select a desired speed that
the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear Information
roads. WARNING
To the extent possible, the system automati‐ The system does not relieve from the
cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle personal responsibility to correctly assess the
ahead of you. traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
The distance that the vehicle maintains to the tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
reasons, it depends on the speed. the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐
spective situations.◀
tomatically reduces the speed, applies the
brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ WARNING
cle ahead begins moving faster.
An unsecured vehicle can put itself into
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and motion and roll away. There is risk of an acci‐
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ dent. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against
riod, the system is able to detect this within the rolling.
given system limits. Your own vehicle will
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
brake automatically and then accelerate again.
against rolling away, observe the following:
If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again
▷ Set the parking brake.
after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐
celerator pedal or press the appropriate button ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, turn the
to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐ front wheels in the direction of the curb.
matically accelerate. ▷ On uphill grades or on a slope, also secure
the vehicle, e.g. with a wheel chock.◀

168
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Overview Radar sensor

Buttons on the steering wheel

Press Function
button

Cruise control on/off, refer to

page 169.

Store/maintain speed, refer to

page 170.
The radar sensor is located in the front
Pause cruise control, refer to bumper.
page 170. Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
Continue cruise control with the structed.
last setting, refer to page 171.

cardiagn.com
Without steering and lane guid‐ Camera
ance assistant:
Increase distance, refer to
page 171.

Without steering and lane guid‐

ance assistant:
Reduce distance, refer to
page 171.

With steering and lane guidance

assistant: The camera is installed near the interior rear‐
Adjust distance, refer to view mirror.
page 171. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐
terior rearview mirror clean and clear.
Rocker switch:
Maintain, store, change speed,
refer to page 170.
Switching on/off and interrupting
cruise control
With steering and lane guidance
assistant: Switching on
Steering and lane guidance as‐ Press button on the steering wheel.
sistant including Traffic Jam As‐
sist on/off, refer to page 177. The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
switched on if needed.

169
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Switch off traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐

To switch off the system while standing, step tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
on brake pedal at the same time.
WARNING
Press button on the steering wheel. Risk of accident due to too high speed
differences to other vehicles, e.g. in the follow‐
The displays go out. The stored desired speed ing situations:
is deleted. ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
vehicle.
Interrupting
▷ Suddenly swerving vehicle onto the own
When active, press the button on the lane.
steering wheel.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
If interrupting the system while stationary, There is risk of injuries or danger to life. Watch
press on the brake pedal at the same time. traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
The system is automatically interrupted in the spective situations.◀

cardiagn.com
following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied. Maintaining/storing the speed
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ Press button.
gaged. Or:
▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is
activated or DSC is deactivated.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.
▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are
opened while the vehicle is standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, e.g., on a road with
very little traffic without curb or shoulder
markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog. terrupted.
▷ After a longer stationary period when the
When the system is switched on, the current
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
speed is maintained and stored as the desired
system.
speed.
Maintaining, storing, and changing the This is displayed in the speedometer and
speed briefly in the instrument cluster, refer to
page 172.
Information DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
WARNING switched on if needed.

The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐

justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the

170
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Changing the speed With steering and lane guidance

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly assistant: adjusting distance
until the desired speed is set. Press button repeatedly until the de‐
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the sired distance is set.
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Continuing cruise control
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐ General information
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Press button with the system inter‐
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed rupted.
past the point of resistance, the desired
The stored speed is reached and maintained.
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. In the following cases, the stored speed value
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the is deleted and cannot be called up again:
action. ▷ When the system is switched off.

cardiagn.com
▷ When drive readiness is switched off.
Distance
WARNING While standing
The system does not relieve from the The system brought the vehicle to a complete
personal responsibility. Due to the system lim‐ standstill:
its, braking can be late. There is risk of acci‐ ▷ Green marking in the speedometer:
dents or risk of property damage. Be aware to
the traffic situation at all times. Adjust the dis‐ Your vehicle accelerates automatically as
tance to the traffic and weather conditions and soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐
maintain the prescribed safety distance, possi‐ dar sensor moves off.
bly by braking.◀ ▷ Speedometer markings turn orange/white
after a short time: no automatic driving off.
Without steering and lane guidance By pressing the button, the time in
assistant: reducing distance which there is automatic driving off is
Press button repeatedly until the de‐ extended.
sired distance is set. Vehicle symbol in the distance indicator is
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ moving away: detected vehicle drove off.
tance, refer to page 172. The system was paused or your vehicle was
brought to a halt actively through stepping on
Without steering and lane guidance the brake pedal and it is standing behind an‐
assistant: increasing distance other vehicle:
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set. 1. Press button to call up a stored
desired speed.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ 2. Release the brake pedal.
tance, refer to page 172.
3. When the vehicle in front drives off:
▷ briefly press the gas pedal.

171
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Symbol Description
▷ Press button.
Distance 3
▷ Press button
▷ Press the rocker switch.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Distance 4
Desired speed This value is set automatically
Display in the speedometer: after the system is switched
▷ Green marking: system is on.
active.
System interrupted.
▷ Marking is orange/white: the
system has been paused.
▷ No marking: system is

cardiagn.com
switched off.

Distance control suppressed

Status display briefly because the gas pedal is
The selected desired speed is hidden pressed.
after a brief time.

If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the

Vehicle symbol in the distance indicator is
conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
moving away: detected vehicle drove off.
rently fulfilled.
ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate
Distance to vehicle ahead of you further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on
the accelerator pedal or pressing the rocker
Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐
switch.
ing ahead of you.

Symbol Description

Distance 1

Distance 2

172
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Indicator/warning lights ▷ Distance too short.

▷ Speed greater than approx.
Symbol Description 40 mph/70 km/h.
Green symbols:
System limits
A vehicle has been detected
ahead of you. The system
Speed range
maintains the set distance to
the vehicle in front. The system is best used on well-constructed
roads.
Vehicle symbol flashes: The minimum speed that can be set is
The conditions are not ade‐ 20 mph/30 km/h.
quate for the system to work. The maximum speed that can be set is
The system was deactivated 115 mph/180 km/h.
but applies the brakes until you The system can also be activated when sta‐
actively resume control by tionary.
pressing on the brake pedal or

cardiagn.com
Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐
accelerator pedal.
uation when using the system.
The vehicle symbol and dis‐
tance bars flash red and an Detection range
acoustic signal sounds:
You are requested to intervene
by braking or make an evasive
maneuver.

Displays in the Head-up Display

With Active Cruise control, some system infor‐
mation can also be displayed in the Head-up
Display.
The detection capacity of the system and the
The symbol is displayed on the Head-
automatic braking capacity are limited.
up Display if the set desired speed is
reached. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not
be detected.

Distance information
Deceleration
The symbol is displayed when the dis‐
The system also does not decelerate in the fol‐
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
lowing situations:
is too short.
▷ For pedestrians or similar slow-moving
The distance information is active under the road users.
following circumstances: ▷ For red traffic lights.
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off. ▷ For cross traffic.
▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, ▷ For oncoming traffic.
refer to page 126.

173
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Swerving vehicles Cornering

A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
until it is completely within the same lane as speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
your vehicle. not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly into a curve at an appropriate speed.
swerves into your lane, the system may not be In tight curves the system offers only restricted
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ detection where a vehicle ahead of you might

cardiagn.com
tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ be detected late or not at all.
ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g.,
when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐
hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected,
the system requests that the driver intervene
by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐
vers, if needed.

WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ When you approach a curve the system may
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐ ating.
spective situations.◀ After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐
activated and controls speed independently.

Driving away
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
▷ On steep inclines.
▷ From behind bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

174
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Weather ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐

In the event of unfavorable weather and light ately after vehicle delivery.
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, ▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A
fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐ Check Control message is displayed.
tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic Cruise control
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.
by braking, steering or evading. The concept
The system maintains a preset speed via the
Radar sensor buttons on the steering wheel. The system
brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking
For US owners only is insufficient.
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication General information
Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐
Depending on the driving settings, the features

cardiagn.com
erned by the following:
of the cruise control can change in certain
FCC ID: areas.
▷ OAYARS3-A The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
Compliance statement: but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following Due to the driving style that minimizes fuel
two conditions: consumption in ECO PRO drive mode, the ve‐
hicle may drop below the set desired speed in
▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐
some situations, e.g. on uphill grades.
ference, and
▷ this device must accept any interference Information
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. WARNING
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to The use of the system can lead to an in‐
these devices could void the user's authority to creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
operate this equipment. tions:
▷ On winding roads.
Malfunction ▷ In heavy traffic.
The system cannot be activated if the radar ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be on a loose road surface.
caused by damage incurred during parking,
There is risk of accidents or risk of property
e.g.
damage. Only use the system if driving at con‐
A Check Control message is displayed if the stant speed is possible.◀
system fails.
The function for detecting and responding
when approaching stationary vehicles may be
limited in the following situations:

175
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Overview Press button on the steering wheel.

Buttons on the steering wheel The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Press but‐ Function
ton Interrupting
Cruise control on/off, refer to When active, press the button.
page 176.

Store/maintain speed, refer to The system is automatically interrupted in the

page 176. following situations:
▷ When the brakes are applied.
Pause cruise control, refer to
▷ If selector lever position D is disengaged.
page 176.
▷ If DTC Dynamic Traction Control is acti‐
Continue cruise control, refer to
vated or DSC is deactivated.
page 177.
▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability.

cardiagn.com
Rocker switch:
Maintain, store, change speed, Maintaining, storing, and changing the
refer to page 177. speed

Information
Controls
WARNING
Switching on The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
Press button on the steering wheel. justed or called up by mistake. There is risk of
an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set tively interfere in the respective situations.◀
to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. Maintaining/storing the speed

DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be Press button.

switched on if needed. Or:

Switch off
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀ Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.

176
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

When the system is switched on, the current ▷ Green marking: system is
speed is maintained and stored as the desired active.
speed. ▷ Marking is orange/white: the
This is displayed, refer to page 177, in the system has been paused.
speedometer and briefly in the instrument ▷ No marking: system is
cluster. switched off.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be
switched on if needed.
Indicator lamp
Changing the speed Indicator lamp green: system is active.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly Gray indicator lamp: the system has
until the desired speed is set. been paused.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the No indicator lamp: system is switched off.
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Status display

cardiagn.com
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
The selected desired speed is hidden
the resistance point, the desired speed in‐
after a brief time.
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
past the point of resistance, the desired conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ rently fulfilled.
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de‐ Displays in the Head-up Display
pends on the vehicle. Some system information can also be dis‐
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ played in the Head-up Display.
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ The symbol is displayed on the Head-
celerates the vehicle without requiring up Display if the set desired speed is
pressure on the accelerator pedal. reached.
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. Steering and lane guidance
assistant including Traffic
Continuing cruise control Jam Assist
Press button while the system is inter‐
rupted. The concept
The system assists the driver in keeping the
The stored speed is reached and maintained. vehicle within the lane. For this purpose, the
system steers independently, e.g., when driv‐
Displays in the instrument cluster ing in a curve.
Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐
Desired speed self according to the lane markings or vehicles
Display in the speedometer: in front.

177
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

General information
The system determines the position of the
lane markings and the vehicle driving ahead
using five radar sensors and a camera.
Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether
the steering wheel is being touched.
In order to be able to use the system, place
your hands around the steering wheel.
The system is deactivated if the steering wheel Front center bumper
is no longer being touched.

Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the

cardiagn.com
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐ Front side bumper
spective situations.◀

Overview

Button the steering wheel

Press but‐ Function

ton

Switch steering and lane guid‐

ance assistant including Traffic Rear bumper
Jam Assist on/off, refer to Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
page 179. dar sensors clean and unobstructed.

Radar sensors
The radar sensors are located in the bumpers.

178
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Camera Steering wheel symbol lights up green.

The system is active.

With the system switched on, pedestrian warn‐
ing and side collision warning are active. Set‐
tings on the Control Display remain un‐
changed.

Switch off
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐ Press button on the steering wheel.
view mirror.
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ The indicator goes out.
terior rearview mirror clean and clear. The system does not manipulate steering.

Automatic interruption

cardiagn.com
Functional requirements
The system is automatically interrupted in the
▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
following situations:
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
▷ When the steering wheel is released.
marking on both sides is detected.
▷ When you manipulate steering.
▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane
marking on both sides or a vehicle driving ▷ When you leave your own lane.
ahead is detected. ▷ When the turn signal is on.
▷ At least one hand on the steering wheel ▷ When the lane is too narrow.
rim. ▷ If for a particular time no lane marking is
▷ Wide curves. detected and there is no vehicle driving in
▷ Drive in the center of the lane. front.
▷ Turn signal not actuated. Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.
▷ Camera calibration immediately after vehi‐ The system is paused and does not
cle delivery is completed. manipulate steering.

Switching on/off If the system conditions are met, the system

reactivates automatically.
Switching on
Press button on the steering wheel.

Steering wheel symbol lights up gray.

System activates automatically as soon as all

function conditions are fulfilled, refer to
page 179.

179
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ In rescue lanes.

▷ Within city limits.
Symbol Description

Steering wheel symbol gray: Weather

the system is on standby. In the event of unfavorable weather and light
conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush,
Steering wheel symbol green: fog or glare, this may result in poorer recogni‐
system activated. tion of vehicles as well as short-term interrup‐
tions for vehicles that are already detected.
Steering wheel symbol and Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic
lane marking green: the system situation. If necessary, intervene actively, e.g.
assists the driver in keeping by braking, steering or evading.
the vehicle within the lane.

Steering wheel symbol green,

PDC Park Distance Control
lane marking gray: no lane

cardiagn.com
marking detected. The vehicle The concept
follows the vehicle in front. PDC is a support when parking. Objects that
you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐
hind the vehicle are indicated with:
Steering wheel symbol yellow:
hold steering wheel. The sys‐ ▷ Signal tones.
tem is still active. ▷ Visual display.
With parking assistant: obstacles on the side of
the vehicle that are detected by the sensors of
Steering wheel symbol red and the parking assistant, can also be reported by
a signal tone sounds: system the PDC. Side protection, refer to page 183.
interrupted. It does not manip‐
ulate steering. General information
Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers and possi‐
bly sideways on the vehicle measure the dis‐
Displays in the Head-up Display tances from objects.
All system information can also be displayed in The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
the Head-up Display. stacle and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
System limits An acoustic warning is first given with the fol‐
When driving with gloves or with protective lowing circumstances:
covers, contact with the steering wheel cannot ▷ By the front center sensors at ap‐
be detected by the sensors. In this case sys‐ prox. 74 in/70 cm.
tem cannot be used.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx.
When driving within narrow lanes, the system 5 ft/1.50 m.
cannot be activated or meaningfully used.
▷ By the corner sensors at ap‐
Do not use the system, e.g.: prox. 24 in/60 cm.
▷ In construction zones.

180
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

▷ With parking assistant: by the side sensors Functional requirements

at approx. 24 in/60 cm. To ensure full functionality:
▷ When a collision is imminent. ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers,
bicycle racks.
Information
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice.
WARNING To clean: when using high-pressure washers,
The system does not relieve from the do not spray the sensors for long periods and
personal responsibility to correctly assess the maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic Switching on/off
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch Switching on automatically
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐ PDC switches on automatically in the following
spective situations.◀ situations:
WARNING ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged

cardiagn.com
Due to high speeds when PDC is acti‐ when the engine is running.
vated, the warning can be delayed due to ▷ While approaching detected obstacles if
physical circumstances. There is risk of injuries the speed is slower than approx.
or risk of property damage. Avoid approaching 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while depends on the situation in question.
PDC is not yet active.◀ You may switch on and off automatic activation
when obstacles are detected.
Overview About iDrive:

Button in the vehicle 1. "My Vehicle"

2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Parking"
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐
spective equipment.
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Depending on equipment, an appropriate cam‐
era view is also switched on.
PDC Park Distance Control
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
Ultrasound sensors
The system switches off when a certain driving
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC, distance or speed is exceeded.
e.g. in the bumpers.
Switch the system back on if needed.

181
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Switching on/off manually 5. "PDC"

Press button. 6. Set the desired value.
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
▷ On: the LED lights up. rently used.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
Visual warning
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.

Display

Signal tones
When approaching an object, an intermittent
sound indicates the position of the object. E. g.
if an object is detected to the left rear of the

cardiagn.com
vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear The approach of the vehicle to an object is
speaker. shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
The shorter the distance to the object, the farther away are already displayed on the Con‐
shorter the intervals. trol Display before a signal sounds.

If the distance to a detected object is less than The display appears as soon as PDC is acti‐
approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is vated.
sounded. The range of the sensors is represented in the
If there are objects in front of and behind the colors green, yellow and red.
vehicle at the same time, with a distance Pathway lines are faded in for better estimation
smaller than approx. 10 in/25 cm, an alternat‐ of the required space.
ing constant tone will sound.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
The interval tone and constant tone are played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a
switched off if the selector lever position P is different view with obstacle markings as
engaged. needed:
The interval tone is switched off after a short "Rear view camera"
time when the vehicle is stationary.
Cross traffic warning, refer to page 197: de‐
pending on the equipment, it is warned in the
Volume
PDC display against vehicles approaching in
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the the front or rear from the side.
entertainment volume can be adjusted.
About iDrive: With parking assistant: emergency
braking function, Active PDC
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "System settings" The concept
3. "Tone" The emergency braking function of PDC ini‐
4. "Volume settings" tiates an emergency braking in case of acute
risk of collision. Due to system limits, a colli‐

182
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

sion cannot be prevented under all circum‐ With parking assistant: side
stances. protection
The function is available from walking speed
while backing up or rolling backward. The concept
A press of the gas pedal interrupts the braking Obstacles on the side of the vehicle are de‐
intervention. tected by the sensors of the system. The sys‐
tem warns against these obstacles.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. To
Display
creep toward the obstacle, lightly press the ac‐
celerator pedal and release it again.
If the accelerator pedal is heavily depressed,
the vehicle drives off as usual. Manual braking
is possible at any time.

General information

cardiagn.com
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of
PDC and parking assistant.

Information Obstacle markings are displayed sideways on

the vehicle to protect the vehicle sides.
WARNING
▷ Gray markings: the area next to the vehicle
The system does not relieve from the was not captured.
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐ ▷ Color markings: warning against detected
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings obstacles.
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀ Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
Activating/deactivating the system that were previously detected by sensors while
About iDrive: passing them.
1. "My Vehicle" The system does not detect, whether an ob‐
stacle moves later on. For this reason, at
2. "Vehicle settings"
standstill, the markings are shown in the dis‐
3. "Parking" play in gray after a certain time. The area next
4. "Active PDC emergency brake function" to the vehicle must be newly captured.
5. "Active PDC emergency brake function"
System limits
The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.

183
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. ▷ In automatic car washes.

coats. ▷ Through heavy pollution.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g.,
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud sweeping machines, high pressure steam
machines. cleaners or neon lights.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position. Malfunction
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as A Check Control message is displayed.
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
White symbol is displayed, and the
treme heat or strong wind.
range of the sensors is dimmed on the
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other Control Display.
vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. PDC has failed. Have the system checked.

▷ With moving objects.

▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as Without Surround View:

cardiagn.com
ledges or cargo.
rearview camera
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure The concept
such as fences. The rearview camera provides assistance in
▷ For objects with porous surfaces. parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
move into the blind area of the sensors before Display.
or after a continuous tone sounds.
Information
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the WARNING
system. The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
False warnings traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
PDC may issue a warning under the following Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
conditions even though there is no obstacle tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
within the detection range: closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
▷ In heavy rain.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed
bumps.
▷ In large buildings with right angles and
smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐
rages.

184
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Overview Switching on/off manually

Press button.
Button in the vehicle
▷ On: the LED lights up.
▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The PDC is shown on the Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed when
the reverse gear is engaged by pressing the
button.

Switching the view via iDrive

Rearview camera With PDC activated:
"Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Camera

cardiagn.com
Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement
▷ The rearview camera is switched on.
▷ The trunk lid is fully closed.

Assistance functions

Activate/deactivate assistance
The camera lens is located in the handle of the functions
tailgate. More than one assistance function can be ac‐
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. tive at the same time.
Clean the camera lens, refer to page 294. ▷ "Parking aid lines"
Pathway lines and turning radius lines are
Switching on/off displayed, refer to page 186.
▷ "Obstacle marking"
Switching on automatically
Spatially-shaped markings are displayed,
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
refer to page 186.
tion P R.

Automatic deactivation during forward

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if needed.

185
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Parking aid lines Parking using pathway and turning radius

lines
Pathway lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.

Obstacle marking

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space

required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering

cardiagn.com
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by

the PDC sensors.
Obstacle markings can be faded into the image
of the rearview camera.
Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.

Setting brightness and contrast via

iDrive
With the rearview camera switched on:
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the rearview camera image together with 1. Move the controller to the left.
pathway lines. 2. ▷ "Brightness"
Turning circle lines show the course of the ▷ "Contrast"
smallest possible turning radius on a level 3. Set the desired value.
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after System limits
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle. Deactivated camera
If the camera is deactivated, e.g. if the tailgate
is open, the camera image is displayed
hatched in gray.

186
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Detection of objects ▷ Top view onto the vehicle, Top View, refer
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding to page 188.
objects such as ledges may not be detected by ▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view for rep‐
the system. resenting the areas on the sides of the ve‐
Assistance functions also take into account hicle, refer to page 191.
data of the PDC. ▷ Camera perspective movable via iDrive, re‐
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to fer to page 188.
page 180. ▷ Panorama View: to present cross traffic,
The objects displayed on the Control Display e.g. at junctions and driveways, depending
under certain circumstances are closer than on the currently engaged gear, refer to
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from page 191.
the objects on the display. Depending on the view, the environment
around the vehicle or a part of it is depicted.
Malfunction
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con‐ Information

cardiagn.com
trol Display. WARNING
A red symbol is displayed and the re‐ The system does not relieve from the
cording range of the malfunctioning personal responsibility to correctly assess the
camera is displayed in black on the traffic situation. There is risk of an accident.
Control Display. Adjust the driving style to the traffic condi‐
tions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings
closely and actively interfere in the respective
situations.◀
Surround View
The concept Overview
The system provides assistance in parking and
Buttons in the vehicle
maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is
shown on the Control Display.
Several cameras display the area from different
selectable perspectives. In addition, assistance
functions, e.g. guidelines, can be faded into the
camera image.

General information
The following camera perspectives can be dis‐
played:
Surround View
▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system
shows the camera perspective suitable for
the respective driving situation, refer to Panorama View
page 188.
▷ Rearview camera: to represent the areas
behind the vehicle, refer to page 188.

187
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Cameras The camera perspective suitable for the re‐

spective driving situation is displayed.

Switching on/off manually

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
The rearview camera cannot be switched off if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Front camera
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.

cardiagn.com
Switch the system back on if needed.

Display

Overview
Rearview camera

1 Function bar
2 Selection window
There are two cameras at the bottom in the ex‐
terior mirror housings. 3 Side view
4 Automatic camera perspective
The image quality may be impaired by dirt on
5 Movable camera perspective
the camera lenses. Clean the camera lenses,
refer to page 294. 6 Camera image
7 Top View
Switching on/off 8 Rearview camera

Switching on automatically
With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐
tion P R.

188
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Selecting the camera perspective Top view

The top view shows the vehicle and surround‐
General information ings from above.
The individual camera perspectives can be se‐
lected in the selection window via iDrive. Rearview camera
This view shows the picture of the rearview
Side view camera.
The side view can be selected for the right or
left vehicle side. Function bar
This view helps when positioning the vehicle at Assistance functions can be activated, refer to
the curb or with other obstacles on the side by page 189, via the function bar and settings ap‐
displaying the side surroundings. plied.
The side view looks from rear to front and in ▷ "Parking Assistant", refer to page 193.
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos‐ ▷ "Brightness", refer to page 192.
sible obstacles.
▷ "Contrast", refer to page 192.

cardiagn.com
Automatic camera perspective ▷ "Parking aid lines", refer to page 190.
The automatic camera perspective shows a ▷ "Obstacle marking", refer to page 190.
steering-dependent view in the respective ▷ "Car wash", refer to page 190.
driving direction. ▷ "Settings": apply settings, e.g. to use
This perspective adapts to the respective driv‐ the activation points for Panorama View.
ing situation.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view Assistance functions
changes to a fixed display of the area in front or
at the rear behind the bumper or if necessary, Activate/deactivate assistance
changes to a side view. functions
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
Movable camera perspective tive at the same time.
With selection of the movable camera per‐ The following assistance functions can be
spective, a circle appears on the Control Dis‐ manually activated:
play. ▷ "Parking aid lines"
By turning the controller or via touch function, ▷ "Obstacle marking"
specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐
lected. ▷ "Car wash"

The current perspective is marked with a cam‐ The following assistance functions are auto‐
era symbol. matically displayed:

With BMW Gesture Control: an additional cam‐ ▷ Side protection, refer to page 191.
era symbols appears on the circuit. This cam‐ ▷ Rim protection, refer to page 191.
era symbol is freely movable via BMW Gesture ▷ Door opening angle, refer to page 191.
Control, refer to page 30.
Exit the circle by pressing the controller or via
touch function on the active camera symbol.

189
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Parking aid lines Parking using pathway and turning radius

lines
Pathway lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
radius line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre‐
sponding turning radius line.

Obstacle marking

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space

required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Pathway lines depend on the current steering

cardiagn.com
angle and are continuously adjusted to the
steering wheel movements.

Turning circle lines Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by

the PDC sensors.
Obstacle markings can be shown in the cam‐
era image.
Their colored margins of the obstacle mark‐
ings match the markings of the PDC.

Car wash view

Turning circle lines can only be superimposed

on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning circle lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐ The car wash view assists when entering a car
gle. wash by displaying the floor and the own lane.

190
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Side protection Rim protection

The concept
Obstacles on the side of the vehicle are de‐
tected by the sensors of the system. The sys‐
tem warns against these obstacles.

Display

An imminent collision of the wheel with the

curb is displayed. The wheel in question is
marked in red.

Door opening angle

cardiagn.com
Obstacle markings are displayed sideways on
the vehicle to protect the vehicle sides.
▷ Gray markings: the area next to the vehicle
was not captured.
▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected.
▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
Limits of side protection displayed in selector lever position P.
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while Panorama View
passing them.
The system does not detect, whether an ob‐ The concept
stacle moves later on. For this reason, at
standstill, the markings are shown in the dis‐
play in gray after a certain time. The area next
to the vehicle must be newly captured.

The system provides an early look at cross

traffic at blind driveways and intersections.
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected

191
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

relatively late from the driver's seat. The cam‐ Activation points are, if possible, stored with
eras in the front and rear capture the sideways town/city and street address or with the GPS
traffic area to improve the view. coordinates.
Yellow lines in the screen display mark the
front and rear end of the vehicle. Using activation points

The camera image shows different levels of The use of activation points can be switched
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita‐ on and off.
ble for distance estimations.
1. Press button.
Display on the Control Display 2. Move the controller to the left.

Press the button when the engine is run‐ 3. "Settings"

ning. 4. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
5. "Panorama view, GPS-based"
Depending on the driving direction, the image
of the respective camera is displayed:
Displaying or deleting activation points

cardiagn.com
▷ "front": front camera image.
▷ "rear": rear camera image. 1. Press button.
The cross traffic warning, refer to page 197, 2. Move the controller to the left.
can additionally warn against oncoming vehi‐ 3. "Show activation points"
cles using radar sensors.
A list of all activation points is displayed.
With navigation system: activation 4. "Delete this activation point" or "Delete all
points activation points"

The concept Setting brightness and contrast via

Positions at which Panorama View is to switch
iDrive
on automatically can be stored as activation With Surround View or Panorama View
points as soon as a GPS signal is received. switched on:
Up to ten activation points can be stored. 1. Move the controller to the left.
Activation points can be used when driving for‐ 2. ▷ "Brightness"
ward for the front camera. ▷ "Contrast"

Storing activation points 3. Set the desired value.

1. Drive to the position at which the system is

Functional limitations
to be switched on, and stop.
The system can be used only to a limited ex‐
tent in the following situations:
2. Press button.
▷ In poor light.
3. Move the controller to the left.
▷ In case of soiled cameras.
4. "Add activation point"
▷ With a door open.
The current position is displayed.
▷ With the tailgate open.
5. "Add activation point"
▷ With exterior mirrors folded in.

192
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Gray hatched areas with symbol, e.g. open Parking assistant

door, in the camera image mark areas that are
currently not displayed. The concept
Gray hatched areas without symbol, e.g. in
front of the vehicle, mark areas that are not
visible to the cameras.

System limits

Non-visible areas
Areas around the vehicle that are not visible
because of the viewing angle of the cameras,
are presented hatched in gray.
The system supports parking in the following
situations:
Detection of objects
▷ When parking parallel to the road.
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding

cardiagn.com
objects such as ledges may not be detected by ▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
the system. road.
Assistance functions also take into account Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
data of the PDC. on both sides of the vehicle.
Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to The system calculates the best possible park‐
page 180. ing line.
The objects displayed on the Control Display When parking parallel or diagonal to the road,
under certain circumstances are closer than the system takes control of steering, accelera‐
they appear. Do not estimate the distance from tion and braking and if needed changes the
the objects on the display. gears during the parking procedure.
Hold down the parking assistant button for the
Malfunction duration of the parking procedure. At the end
A camera malfunction is displayed on the Con‐ of the parking procedure, the P selector lever
trol Display. position is set.
When parking, also take note of the visual and
A yellow symbol is displayed and the
acoustic information and instructions issued
recording range of the malfunctioning
by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐
camera is displayed in black on the
view camera and react accordingly.
Control Display.
A component of the system is the PDC Park
Distance Control, refer to page 180.

Information
Loud noises from outside and inside the vehi‐
cle may prevent you from hearing the PDC's
signal tone.

193
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

WARNING Ultrasound sensors

The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess the
traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐
tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic
situations. There is risk of an accident. Adjust
the driving style to the traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively interfere in the re‐
spective situations.◀

CAUTION
With the four side ultrasound sensors, arrows,
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
and the ultrasound sensors of the PDC in the
cle over or onto curbs. There is risk of property
bumpers, the parking spaces are measured
damage. Watch traffic closely and actively in‐
and the distances to obstacles determined.
terfere in the respective situations.◀
To ensure full functionality:
An engine that has been switched off by the

cardiagn.com
▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice, re‐
Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐
fer to page 294.
cally when the parking assistant is activated.
▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not
Overview spray the sensors for long periods and
maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.
Button in the vehicle ▷ Do not put stickers over sensors.

Requirements

For measuring parking spaces

▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Parking assistant Suitable parking space

General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Diagonal parking:

194
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

▷ Width of gap between two objects: your 4. "Parking Assistant"

vehicle's width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m up 5. "Sound if parking space detected"
to maximum 16 ft/5 m.
Settings are stored.
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must Display on the Control Display
be estimated by the driver. Dur to technical
limitations, the system can approximate System activated/deactivated
the depth of diagonal parking spaces only.
Symbol Meaning
Regarding the parking procedure
Gray: the system is not available.
▷ Doors and trunk lid closed.
White: the system is available but
▷ Parking brake released. not activated.
▷ Driver's safety belt fastened.
The system is activated.
Switching on/off

cardiagn.com
System status
Switching on with the button
Press button.
The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search

is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with reverse gear

Shift into reverse. ▷ Colored symbols, arrows, on the side of
The current status of the parking space search the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant is
is indicated on the Control Display. activated and search for parking space ac‐
tive.
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
Switch off spaces at the edge of the road next to the
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant
The system can be deactivated as follows: is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐
▷ Press button. lighted in color and a signal tone sounds.
Switch signal tone on/off, refer to
page 195.
Signal tone for switching suitable ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
parking spaces on/off clearly detected, the system automatically
About iDrive: adjusts the suitable parking method. In the
1. "My Vehicle" case of parking spaces suitable for parallel
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is
2. "Vehicle settings" displayed. In this case, the desired parking
3. "Parking" method must be selected manually.

195
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ Interrupting automatically

tive. Steering control has The system is interrupted automatically in the
been taken over by system. following situations:
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if
he takes over steering.
▷ Parking space search is always active
▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
surfaces.
slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated, ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to
the displays on the Control Display are overcome, such as curbs.
shown in gray. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly
arise.
Parking using the parking assistant ▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays
clearances that are too small.
1. Press the button or shift into reverse
to switch on the parking assistant. Activate ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts
or the time taken for parking is exceeded.

cardiagn.com
parking assistant if necessary.
The parking assistant is activated. ▷ When switching to another function on the
Control Display.
2. Drive by the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h ▷ When the button is released.
and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ If the tailgate is open.
The status of the parking space search and ▷ If doors are open.
possible parking spaces are displayed on ▷ When setting the parking brake.
the Control Display.
▷ During acceleration.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for
play.
an extended period while the vehicle is sta‐
Hold down the parking assistant button for tionary.
the duration of the parking procedure. At
▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt.
the end of the parking procedure, the P se‐
lector lever position is set. A Check Control message is displayed.

The end of the parking procedure is indi‐

Resume
cated on the Control Display.
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
4. Adjust the parking position yourself if
tinued if needed.
needed.
Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
Interrupting manually
System limits
The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
time:
No parking assistance
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
on the Control Display.
tance in the following situations:
▷ Release button during the parking
▷ In tight curves.
procedure.

196
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Functional limitations Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of

The system may not be fully functional in the the vehicle is not taken into account by the
following situations: system.

▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel It can happen that parking spaces are detected
roads. that are not suitable or suitable parking spaces
are not detected.
▷ On slippery ground.
▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. Malfunction
▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the A Check Control message is displayed.
parking space.
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. checked.
▷ In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
Cross traffic warning
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
The concept

cardiagn.com
Ultrasonic measuring might not function under
the following circumstances:
▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g.
coats.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud
machines.
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as the area behind the vehicle.
high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐
At blind driveways or when driving out of diag‐
treme heat or strong wind.
onal parking spaces, approaching cross traffic
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other is earlier detected by the system than possible
vehicles. from the driver's seat.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. The system indicates approaching traffic.
▷ With moving objects. The lamp in the exterior mirror lights up, a sig‐
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as nal tone may sound, and the respective indica‐
ledges or cargo. tor is called up on the Control Display.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
With the respective equipment variant, the
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure traffic area in front of the vehicle is monitored
such as fences. as well. Two additional radar sensors are lo‐
▷ For objects with porous surfaces. cated in the front bumpers.
Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can
move into the blind area of the sensors before
or after a continuous tone sounds.

197
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driver assistance systems

Information
WARNING
The system does not relieve from the
personal responsibility to correctly assess visi‐
bility and traffic situation. There is risk of an ac‐
cident. Adjust the driving style to the traffic
conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively
interfere in the respective situations.◀

With the respective equipment variant, there

Overview are two additional radar sensors in the front
bumper.
Button in the vehicle
Always keep the bumper in the area of the ra‐
dar sensors clean and unobstructed.

Switching on/off

cardiagn.com
Activating/deactivating the system

1. Press button.
2. Move the controller to the left.
3. "Settings"
Parking assistance systems
4. "Cross traffic alert"
5. "Crossing-traffic warning"
Radar sensors
Switching on automatically
If the system is activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is automatically switched on as soon as
PDC or Panorama View is active.

Switching off automatically

The system is automatically switched off in the
following situations:
▷ When exceeding a speed of ap‐
The radar sensors are located in the rear prox. 4 mph/7 km/h.
bumper.
▷ With the steering and lane guidance assis‐
tant active, when a certain driving distance
is exceeded.

198
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driver assistance systems Controls

Display Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the front or rear

edge of the own vehicle.
Lamp in the exterior mirror
Acoustic warning
In addition to the optical indicator, a warning
signal sounds if the own vehicle moves into the
respective direction.

System limits
The system may not be fully functional in the
following situations:
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is
The lamp in the exterior mirror flashes if vehi‐
very high.
cles are detected by the rear sensors and the
vehicle is moving backwards. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.

cardiagn.com
Display in the PDC view ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered
with stickers.
▷ If crossing objects move at a very slow
speed.
▷ If other objects are in the capture range of
the sensors, that hide cross traffic.

The respective boundary area in the PDC view

flashes red, if vehicles are detected by the sen‐
sors.

Display in the camera view

The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the

camera view flashes red, if vehicles are de‐
tected by the sensors.

199
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving comfort

Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Overview

This chapter describes all standard, country- Button in the vehicle

specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Air suspension

cardiagn.com
Level adjustment

The concept
Air suspension ensures best possible driving Adjusting the level manually
comfort under all load conditions. Due to a var‐ Press button.
iable adjustment of the front and rear axles, the
damping is adjusted to the vehicle condition.
In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to
the raised level with a press of the button.
General information
Starting at a speed of approx. 20 mph/35 km/h
In the case of an uneven road surface, the ve‐
the vehicle lower itself automatically to the
hicle level can be elevated to increase ground
normal level.
clearance.
▷ Normal level, for normal road surface. Display
▷ Raised level, when the road surface is poor. ▷ LED off: normal level.
In the SPORT driving mode, refer to page 110, ▷ LED flashes: level is being adjusted.
or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers itself.
▷ LED lit: raised level.

Information ▷ LED flashes fast: level adjustment not pos‐

sible.
WARNING
With lowering the vehicle, body parts can System limits
be jammed. There is risk of injuries. When low‐ With several manual level changes one after
ering the vehicle, make sure that the areas of another, the system will switch itself off if nec‐
movement under the vehicle and under the essary. The fast-flashing LED on the button in‐
wheel housing are free.◀ dicates that the system is temporarily unavaila‐
ble.

Tire change
Before a tire change, deactivate the system:

200
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving comfort Controls

Press button and hold for approx. 7 sec‐ Tuning

onds, then release. The LED flashes fast.
Drive mode Damper tuning
Activate system:
The system is activated again automatically COMFORT PLUS comfortable
when you drive away. SPORT firm

Malfunction COMFORT/ECO PRO balanced out

A Check Control message is displayed. The
system is disrupted. Vehicle handling may be
altered and driving comfort may be noticeably Executive Drive Pro
reduced. Have checked by a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐ The concept
pair shop. Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled
chassis. It increases driving comfort and mini‐
Long periods when vehicle is parked mizes the lateral tilt when driving around

cardiagn.com
During long periods when the vehicle is curves. This increases both the agility of the
parked, it can lower itself. This is not a mal‐ vehicle as well as the vehicle comfort.
function. Executive Drive Pro includes the following sys‐
tems:
▷ Active damping adjustment, refer to
Dynamic Damping Control page 201.
The concept ▷ Active roll stabilization, refer to page 202.
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces. Active damping adjustment
The system enhances driving dynamics and
The concept
comfort fitting road surface and driving style.
The system increases driving comfort. Using a
camera in the area of the interior mirror, the
General information
road surface is detected and damping auto‐
The system offers several different damping matically adjusted to the road surface.
settings.
These are assigned to the different driving
modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
to page 110.

201
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Driving comfort

Overview Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed when
Camera there is a camera malfunction. Visit the nearest
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.

Active roll stabilization

The concept
The system reduces the lateral inclination of
the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in
The camera is installed near the interior rear‐ curves or during quick evasive maneuvers.
view mirror. The lateral inclination of the vehicle is bal‐
Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ anced out by permanent adjustment on the
terior rearview mirror clean and clear. front and rear axles. The vehicle is thus always

cardiagn.com
stabilized.

General information Agility and driving comfort are increased under

all driving conditions.
The system is active up to a speed
of 75 mph/120 km/h.
General information
System limits The system offers several different damping
settings.
Functional limitations These are assigned to the different driving
The system may not be fully functional or may modes of the Driving Dynamics Control, refer
not be available in the following situations: to page 110.

▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐

Tuning
fall.
▷ In tight curves. Drive mode Damper tuning
▷ At rapid steering angles.
COMFORT/COMFORT comfortable
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in PLUS
front of you.
SPORT firm
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
gine, via the Start/Stop button.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the front
windshield are dirty or covered.
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun
low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.

202
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Climate control Controls

Climate control
Vehicle features and options Press but‐ Function
ton
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the Recirculated-air mode, refer to
series. It also describes features that are not page 205.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This Air flow, manual, refer to
also applies to safety-related functions and page 205.
systems. The respectively applicable country Air distribution, manual, refer
provisions must be observed when using the to page 205.
respective features and systems.
SYNC program, refer to
page 206.
Automatic climate control

cardiagn.com
Defrost and defog window, re‐
fer to page 206.
Overview
Rear window defroster, refer to
Switch in the center console page 206.

Active seat ventilation, refer to

page 92.

Seat heating, refer to page 91.

Ambient air package, refer to

page 211.

Climate control functions in detail

Press but‐ Function
ton Switching the system on/off

Temperature, refer to Switching on

page 204.
Press any button except:
▷ Rear window defroster.
▷ Left side of Air volume button.
Climate control operation, refer ▷ Seat heating.
to page 204. ▷ Seat ventilation.
Maximum cooling, refer to ▷ SYNC program.
page 204.
Switch off
AUTO program, refer to
▷ Complete system:
page 204.

203
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Climate control

Press and hold the left button on Maximum cooling

the driver's side until the control
Press button.
clicks off.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
▷ On the front passenger side:
perature, optimum air flow and air circulation
Press and hold the left button on mode.
the front passenger side.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
Temperature gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Turn the ring to set the desired The function is available with external temper‐
temperature. atures beyond approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
engine running.
Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐
gram active.
The automatic climate control achieves this
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed AUTO program

cardiagn.com
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐ Press button.
pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ ture are controlled automatically.
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ Depending on the selected temperature,
just the set temperature. AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐
ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side
Information windows, upper body, and into the footwell.
Symbol is displayed permanently on the The cooling function, refer to page 204, is
display of the automatic climate control. switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Cooling function At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
The car's interior can only be cooled with the trols the program so as to prevent window
engine running. condensation as much as possible.
Press button. The LED lights up. To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribution.
The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐
fied and, depending on the temperature set‐
Intensity of the AUTO program
ting, warmed again.
With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐
Depending on the weather, the windshield and matic intensity control can be changed.
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
Press the left or right side of the but‐
gine is started.
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ sity.
cally with the AUTO program.
When using the automatic climate control, The selected intensity is shown on the display
condensation water, refer to page 236, devel‐ of the automatic climate control.
ops that exits underneath the vehicle.

204
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Climate control Controls

Automatic recirculated-air control Operating via button

AUC Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
The concept
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
The automatic recirculated air control AUC au‐
tomatically recognizes odors or pollutants in ▷ LED on: the supply of outside air is perma‐
the outside air. The outside air supply is then nently shut off.
automatically shut off, the interior air is recircu‐ With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
lated. quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
fogging of the windows increases.
General information
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐ If there is window condensation,
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut- switch off the recirculated-air mode
off automatically. and press the button on the driver's side to uti‐
lize the condensation sensor. Make sure that
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐ air can flow to the windshield.
uously flows into the car's interior.

cardiagn.com
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
Air flow, manual
fogging of the windows increases. To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
gram first.
If there is window condensation,
switch off the recirculated-air mode Press the left or right side of the but‐
and press the button on the driver's side to uti‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow.
lize the condensation sensor. Make sure that
The selected air flow is shown on the display of
air can flow to the windshield.
the automatic climate control.
The air flow of the automatic climate control
Switching on/off may be reduced automatically to save battery
About iDrive: power.
1. "My Vehicle"
Manual air distribution
2. "Vehicle settings"
Press button repeatedly to select a
3. "Climate functions"
program:
4. "Air quality"
5. "Automatic air recirculation" ▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell.
▷ Upper body region and footwell.
Recirculated-air mode ▷ Footwell.
▷ Windows and footwell.
The concept
▷ Windows.
You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ ▷ Windows and upper body.
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The ▷ Upper body region.
system then recirculates the air currently The selected air distribution is shown on the
within the vehicle. display of the automatic climate control.

205
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Climate control

If there is window condensation, press This combined filter should be replaced during
the button on the driver's side to uti‐ scheduled maintenance, refer to page 279, of
lize the condensation sensor. your vehicle.

SYNC program
Ventilation
Press button.
The current settings on the driver's Setting
side for temperature, air flow, air distribution, The air flow directions can be individually ad‐
and AUTO program are transferred to the front justed:
passenger side and to the left and right rear.
▷ Direct ventilation:
To switch off, press the button again.
The air flow is directly pointed onto the
The program is switched off if the settings on person. The air flow heats or cools noticea‐
the front passenger side or in the rear are bly, depending on the adjusted tempera‐
changed. ture.

cardiagn.com
▷ Indirect ventilation:
Defrosts windows and removes If the vents are fully or partly closed, the air
condensation is directly routed into the car's interior.
Press button. Indirect ventilation can also be adjusted on
Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ the Control Display.
moved from the windshield and the front side
windows. Front ventilation
For this purpose, point the side vents onto the
side windows as needed.

Adjust air flow with the program active.

If there is window condensation, you
can also switch on the air conditioning
or press the button to utilize the condensation
sensor.

Rear window defroster ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
Press button.
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
The rear window defroster switches closing of the vents, arrow 2
off automatically after a certain period of time.
▷ Touch sensor or thumbwheel to vary the
temperature, arrow 3.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter With touch sensor, push the marking in the
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from desired direction:
the incoming air.
Toward blue: colder.
The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous
Toward red: warmer.
pollutants from the outside air that enters the
vehicle.

206
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Climate control Controls

The set interior temperature for the driver Lateral ventilation

and passenger are not changed.

Adjusting the ventilation

▷ Ventilation for cooling:
Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's
interior is too hot.
▷ Draft-free ventilation:
Adjust the vent to let the air flow past the
occupants. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
Indirect ventilation
▷ Thumbwheel for continuous opening and
Air is indirectly routed into the car's interior. closing of the vents, arrow 2.
About iDrive:

cardiagn.com
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings" Rear automatic climate
3. "Climate functions" control
4. "Indirect ventilation"
Overview
Ventilation in rear, center

1 Temperature
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, 2 AUTO program
arrow 1. 3 Air distribution, manual
▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐ 4 Air flow, AUTO intensity
row 2. 5 Display
Toward blue: colder. 6 Maximum cooling
Toward red: warmer. 7 Seat heating  91
8 Active seat ventilation  92

207
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Climate control

Switch on/off: via iDrive The selected intensity is shown on the display
1. "My Vehicle" of the automatic climate control.

2. "Vehicle settings"
Temperature
3. "Climate functions"
Turn the ring to set the desired
4. "Rear climate" temperature.
The rear automatic climate control is not ready
for operation if the automatic climate control is
switched off or if the function for defrosting or
defogging the windows is active: defrost win‐ The automatic climate control achieves this
dows and remove condensation. temperature as quickly as possible, if needed
by using the maximum cooling or heating ca‐
Switch on/off: via button pacity, and then keeps it constant.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐
Switching on
perature settings. The automatic climate con‐
Press any button except: trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the

cardiagn.com
▷ Left side of Air volume button. set temperature.
▷ Seat heating. The temperature can also be operated using
▷ Seat ventilation. BMW Touch Command.

Switch off Information

Symbol is displayed permanently on the
Press and hold the left button.
display of the automatic climate control.

AUTO program Manual air distribution

The air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐
Press button.
ual needs.
Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐
ture are controlled automatically: Press button repeatedly to select a
program:
Depending on the selected temperature, the
AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air ▷ Upper body region.
is directed to the upper body and into the foot‐ ▷ Upper body region and footwell.
well. ▷ Footwell.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐ The air distribution can also be operated using
cally with the AUTO program. BMW Touch Command.

Intensity of the AUTO program Air flow, manual

With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐
matic intensity control can be changed: gram first.
Press the left or right side of the but‐ Press the left or right side of the but‐
ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow.
sity.

208
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Climate control Controls

The selected air flow is shown on the display of Ventilation

the automatic climate control.
The air flow can also be operated using BMW
Touch Command.

Maximum cooling
Press button.
The system is set to the lowest tem‐
perature, maximum air flow and air circulation
mode.
Thumbwheel for changing the air flow direc‐
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ tion.
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
▷ At an external temperature of approx. Parked-car ventilation/

cardiagn.com
32 ℉/0 ℃.
heating
▷ When the engine is running.
Operation is also possible using BMW Touch The concept
Command. The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐
cle interior and lowers its temperature, if
Climate control operation on the needed.
roofliner The parked-car heating warms the vehicle in‐
terior, making snow and ice easier to remove.
Temperature
The system uses the fuel of the vehicle for
Turn the ring to set the desired heat generation.
temperature.
Parked-car ventilation and parked-car heating
can be switched on and off directly or via a pre-
set departure time.
The reel-on time is automatically determined
Air flow based on the external temperature. The sys‐
tem promptly switches on before the selected
Press the left or right side of the but‐ departure time.
ton: decrease or increase air flow.

LEDs indicate the intensity of the air supply. Information

The air flow may be reduced automatically to DANGER
save battery power. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐

209
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Climate control

tion. Do not switch on parked-car heating in ▷ SYNC program.

enclosed areas.◀
Via the iDrive
WARNING
Parked-car ventilation can be switched on or
During parked-car heating operation, off via iDrive.
high temperatures can occur underneath the
body, e.g. caused by the exhaust gas system. If 1. "My Vehicle"
combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, 2. "Vehicle settings"
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust 3. "Climate functions"
gas system, these materials can ignite. There
is risk of fire. Make sure that no combustible 4. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/
materials can come in contact with hot vehicle ventilation"
parts during parked-car heating operation.◀ 5. "Activate now"

At external temperatures below 32 ℉/0 ℃, wa‐ symbol on the automatic climate control
ter vapor occurs that emerges from below the signals to switched on system.
vehicle.
Via BMW display key

cardiagn.com
Functional requirements Parked-car ventilation and parked-car heating
▷ The vehicle is in the idle or operating readi‐ can be switched on or off via the BMW display
ness state. key.

▷ Battery is sufficiently charged. Switching on directly

▷ Parked-car heating: the fuel tank is filled to 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
above the reserve range. key.
Open the vents to allow air to flow out. 2. "Climate control setting"
3. , Tap symbol.
Switching on/off directly
There are different ways to switch the system 4. "Activate now"
on or off. 5. "Start"
It switches of automatically after some time.
Switching off directly
The system continues to run for some time af‐
ter being switched off. 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
key.
Via the automatic climate control 2. "Climate control setting"
button 3. , Tap symbol.
When the vehicle is in standby state, parked- 4. "Stop"
car ventilation can be switched on or off via the
automatic climate control buttons. Departure time
Press any button except: Different departure times can be adjusted to
▷ Rear window defroster. ensure a comfortable interior temperature in
▷ Left side of Air volume button. the vehicle at the time of departure.

▷ Seat heating. ▷ One-time departure time: the time can be

set.
▷ Seat ventilation.

210
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Climate control Controls

The system is switched on once at the de‐ 3. "Comfort heating/ventilation"

sired time. 4. "For departure time"
▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day Activate the desired departure time.
of the week can be set.
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
The system is switched on repeatedly on trol signals an activated departure time.
the desired day of the week and time.
The departure time is pres-set in two steps: Via BMW display key
▷ Set departure times. 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
▷ Activate departure times. key.
2. "Climate control setting"
Setting departure time 3. , Tap symbol.
4. Tap symbol.
Via the iDrive
Activate the desired departure time.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Climate functions"

cardiagn.com
3. "Comfort ventilation" or "Comfort heating/ Ambient air package
ventilation"
4. Select the desired departure time. The concept
5. Set the departure time. The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean
and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐
6. Select day of the week if needed.
grances.
Via BMW display key Two fragrances can be selected in the vehicle.
A variety other fragrances is possible by re‐
1. Switch on the display of the BMW display
placing the fragrance cartridges.
key.
Ionization is used to clean the air from sus‐
2. "Climate control setting"
pended particles. Together with the selected
3. , Tap symbol. fragrance, ionization enhances well-being and
4. Select the desired departure time. relaxation while driving.
5. If necessary, tap day of the week.
Ionization
6. Select time.
Ionization cleans the vehicle's interior air of
7. "OK"
suspended particles.
Activating the departure time
Switching ionization on/off
If a departure time should influence the switch‐
About iDrive:
ing on of parked-car heating/ventilation, the re‐
spective departure time must be activated first. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
Via the iDrive
3. "Climate functions"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. "Air quality"
2. "Climate functions"
5. "Ionization"

211
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Climate control

An indicator in the climate control display sig‐ 3. "Climate functions"

nals that the ionization is switched on. 4. "Air quality"
Ionization can also be operated using BMW 5. "Fragrance"
Touch Command.
6. Select desired setting.
Fragrancing The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
General information
Perfuming is done at intervals in order to avoid
Switching fragrancing on/off,
a habituation effect.
adjusting intensity
The fragrance intensity can be adjusted on the
Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow
Control Display or via the button on the center
comfortable switching between the fragrances.
console.
The fragrance cartridges are located in the
glove compartment. Adjusting via iDrive
1. "My Vehicle"
Overview

cardiagn.com
2. "Vehicle settings"
Button in the center console 3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. "Level"
7. Select desired setting.

Adjusting via button

Press button once for each intensity
level.
Switch fragrancing on/off, adjust in‐ Highest intensity if three bars are shown on
tensity. the climate control display.
Fragrancing is deactivated if no bars are dis‐
Functional requirements played.

▷ Fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled.

▷ Interior temperature between 41 ℉/+5 ℃ Adjusting via BMW Touch Command
and 104 ℉/+40 ℃. The ambient air package can also be operated
using BMW Touch Command.
Selecting the fragrance
Two different fragrances can be selected in the Display
vehicle.
On the Control Display
About iDrive:
With operation via button, the menu of the Am‐
1. "My Vehicle" bient Air Package can be displayed on the
2. "Vehicle settings" Control Display automatically.

212
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Climate control Controls

Thus additional settings can be made if de‐ The cartridge holder slides down.
sired.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
6. "Show fragrance setting"
3. Remove cover of the fragrance cartridge to
The menu is shown on the Control Display. be inserted. Touch the cover on its top to
push it away from the fragrance cartridge,
Fragrance cartridge filling level arrow 1.
The illustrations on the Control Display show Insert the cover on the back side of the fra‐
the actual filling level of the fragrance car‐ grance cartridge, arrow 2.

cardiagn.com
tridges.
About iDrive:

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Climate functions"
4. "Air quality"
5. "Fragrance"
The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐
played. 4. Position fragrance cartridge such that the
6. Select desired setting. chip faces away from the cartridge holder,
arrow 1.
If an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated,
carrier fluid is still left. However, it is not suffi‐ Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐
cient for the perfuming. sure into the cartridge holder, arrow 2. The
cartridge engages easily noticeable.
A required fragrance cartridge replacement is
automatically indicated on the Control Display.

Inserting fragrance cartridges

The system can be accessed via the glove
compartment.

1. Open the glove compartment, refer to

page 225.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
holder, arrow. 5. Push the cartridge holder up, until it en‐
gages.

213
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Climate control

Make sure that no objects press against Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: corresponds
the cartridge holder from below, otherwise to the second fragrance indicated on the
the function of the ambient air package Control Display.
could be impacted.
6. Close the glove compartment.

Removing the fragrance cartridge

The fragrance cartridges are accessed via the
glove compartment.

1. Open the glove compartment, refer to

page 225.
2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge
4. Pull the desired fragrance cartridge from
holder, arrow.
the holder, arrow.
The cartridge holder slides down.

cardiagn.com
Empty fragrance cartridges can taken to a
3. Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: corresponds dealer’s service center or another qualified
to the first fragrance indicated on the Con‐ service center or repair shop for recycling.
trol Display.
If the fragrance cartridges are refilled with fra‐
grance of a different brand, the vehicle manu‐
facturer will not assume warranty for possible
effects of the fragrances on interior materials,
e.g. odor, deposits, color changes, or possible
system damages.

214
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Interior equipment Controls

Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Compatibility

This chapter describes all standard, country- If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
specific and optional features offered with the ing or in the instructions of the system
series. It also describes features that are not to be controlled, the system is gener‐
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ally compatible with the universal garage door
the selected options or country versions. This opener.
also applies to safety-related functions and If you have any questions, please contact:
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
provisions must be observed when using the fied service center or repair shop.
respective features and systems.
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex

Universal Integrated Remote

cardiagn.com
Corporation.
Control
Controls on the interior rearview
The concept mirror
The universal garage door opener can operate
up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐
tems such as garage door drives or lighting
systems. The universal garage door opener re‐
places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters.
To operate the remote control, the buttons on
the interior rearview mirror must be program‐
med with the desired functions. The hand-held
transmitter for the particular system is required
in order to program the remote control.
▷ Buttons, arrow 1
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
▷ LED, arrow 2.
functions for the sake of security.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
Information quired for programming.

WARNING
Programming
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
General information
door, using the universal garage door opener.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐ 1. Turn on operations.
age. Make sure that the area of movement of 2. Initial setup:
the respective system is clear during program‐ Press and hold the left and right buttons on
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐ the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀ proximately 10 seconds until the LED
flashes rapidly green. This erases all pro‐

215
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Interior equipment

gramming of the buttons on the interior Read the system's operating manual, or press
rearview mirror. the programmed button on the interior rear‐
3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior
grammed. The LED flashes orange. rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then
stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐
features an alternating-code system. Flashing
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to
and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐
8 cm away from the buttons of the interior
peat for approximately 20 seconds.
mirror. The required distance depends on
the manual transmitter. For systems with an alternating-code system,
the universal garage door opener and the sys‐
5. Press and hold the button of the desired
tem also have to be synchronized.
function on the hand-held transmitter. The
LED on the interior mirror will begin flash‐ Please read the operating manual to find out
ing slowly orange. how to synchronize the system.

6. As soon as the LED flashes green more Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
rapidly or lights up continuously, release ond person.
the button. Green light indicates that the To synchronize:

cardiagn.com
button on the interior mirror was program‐
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
med. Faster green flashing indicates that it
mote-controlled system.
is a change-code wireless system.
2. Program the relevant button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at
rearview mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐
tween the interior rearview mirror and the 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. on the system being programmed. You
Several more attempts at different distan‐ have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
ces may be necessary. Wait at least 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
15 seconds between attempts. interior rearview mirror for approximately
Canada: if programming with the hand- 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary,
held transmitter was interrupted, hold repeat this step up to three times in order
down the interior rearview mirror button to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐
and repeatedly press and release the zation is complete, the programmed func‐
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ tion will be carried out.
onds.
7. To program other functions on other but‐
Reprogramming individual buttons
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Turn on operations.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 2. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐
rior rearview mirror buttons. grammed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
Special feature of the alternating- flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
code wireless system mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
If you are unable to operate the system after prox. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the
repeated programming, please check if the buttons of the interior mirror. The required
system to be controlled features an alternat‐ distance depends on the manual transmit‐
ing-code system. ter.

216
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Interior equipment Controls

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the Deleting stored functions
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ Press and hold the left and right button on the
mitter. interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes rap‐
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly or idly green. All stored functions are deleted.
lights up continuously. The LED flashing The functions cannot be deleted individually.
more rapidly or being continuously light up
indicates that the button on the interior
mirror has been programmed. The system Sun visor
can then be controlled by the button on the
interior rearview mirror. Glare shield
If the LED does not flash faster after at Fold the sun visor down or up.
least 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the step. Several more attempts at Glare shield from the side
different distances may be necessary. Wait
at least 15 seconds between attempts. Folding out

cardiagn.com
Canada: if programming with the hand- 1. Fold the sun visor down.
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to
down the interior rearview mirror button
the side.
and repeatedly press and release the
hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ 3. Move it back to the desired position.
onds.
Folding up
Controls Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ Vanity mirror
ing remote-controlled systems, e.g. the garage
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐
door, using the universal garage door opener.
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐
mirror lighting switches on.
age. Make sure that the area of movement of
the respective system is clear during program‐
ming and operation. Also follow the safety in‐
structions of the hand-held transmitter.◀ Ashtray
The system, such as the garage door, can be Front
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the drive or operating readiness is Opening
switched on. To do this, hold down the button 1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
within receiving range of the system until the hind the cup holders. Push the cover for‐
function is activated. The interior rearview mir‐
ror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is be‐
ing transmitted.

217
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Interior equipment

ward again until it engages behind the stor‐ Rear

age compartment.
Opening

2. Fold the cover upward.

Press on the cover, arrow.

Emptying

cardiagn.com
Emptying

Grasp the insert on the side, arrows, and re‐

move it.

Lighter
Information
Grasp the insert on the side and pull it out. WARNING
Contact with hot heating elements or the
hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause
burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the
cigarette lighter falls down or is held against
the respective objects. There is risk of fire and
injuries. Hold the cigarette lighter on its handle.
Make sure that children do not use the ciga‐
rette lighter and do not burn themselves, e.g.
by carrying the remote control along when ex‐
iting the vehicle.◀

218
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Interior equipment Controls

CAUTION With rear console

If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀

Front center console

Slide the cover rearward. The cigarette lighter

is located between the cup holders.

Controls
Push in the lighter.

cardiagn.com
The cigarette lighter is located between the The lighter can be removed as
cup holders. soon as it pops back out.

Rear center console

Without rear console Connecting electrical

devices
Information
CAUTION
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
Open the cover. The cigarette lighter is on the ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
right side. terminals in the engine compartment.◀
To close the cover, tap it again.
CAUTION
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.◀

219
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Interior equipment

Sockets

General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment when operation and the
drive-ready state are switched on.

Information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts. Open the cover. Remove the cover or cigarette
lighter.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors. To close the cover, tap it again.

If equipped with rear console:

Front center console
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders.

cardiagn.com
The socket is located between the cup holders
under the cover.

2. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.

Front center armrest

Rear center console Remove the cover.

If not equipped with rear console:

220
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Interior equipment Controls

Rear center armrest Common file systems are supported.

FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
formats.
Information about compatible USB devices can
be found at www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.
The following applications are possible:
▷ Exporting and importing profiles, refer to
page 58.
▷ Listening to music files via USB audio.
▷ Watching video films via USB video.
There is a socket in the storage compartment
in the center armrest, arrow. ▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
page 46.

In the trunk Information

Observe the following when connecting:

cardiagn.com
▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
nector into the USB interface.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical
damage.
▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐
ing external devices.
Fold open the cover. ▷ Due to the large number of audio devices
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
anteed that every USB device is operable
on the vehicle.
USB interface
▷ Do not expose audio devices to extreme
The concept environmental conditions, such as very
high temperatures; refer to the audio de‐
External devices with USB port can be con‐
vice operating instructions.
nected to the USB interface.
▷ Due to the different configurations of audio
The following audio devices can be connected:
and video files, e.g., bit rates greater than
▷ Mobile phones and smartphones sup‐ 256 kbit/s, or the many different compres‐
ported by the USB interface. sion techniques, proper playback cannot
The snap-in adapter features a separate be guaranteed in all cases.
USB port that is automatically connected ▷ The connected audio device is supplied
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐ with a max. power of 1 A if supported by
serted. the device. Therefore, do not additionally
▷ Audio devices with USB port, e.g. MP3 connect the device to a socket inside the
player. vehicle; otherwise, playback may be com‐
▷ USB storage devices. promised.
Not compatible USB devices:

221
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Interior equipment

▷ USB hard drives. Opening through-loading without

▷ USB hubs. comfort seats
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐ 1. Fold down the center armrest.
serts. 2. Remove flap.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
▷ MTP devices.
▷ Devices such as fans or lights.

In the center armrest

3. Pull handle down, arrow 1, and fold panel

forward, arrow 2.

cardiagn.com
The USB interface is located in the center arm‐
rest.

In the center console

Opening through-loading with comfort

seats
1. If equipped with rear console: fold down
center armrest.
2. If equipped with rear console: push cover
upward until it engages.

The USB interface is located in the center con‐

sole.

Through-loading system
General information
The through-loading system allows the trans‐
port of long objects, such as skies.

222
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Interior equipment Controls

3. Pull on the loop. 3. Fold the folding table down.

The folding table can be rotated by 90° or 180°

to the left and can be enlarged.
Folding table in the rear Proceed in reverse order to fold in the folding
table.
General information
There is a folding table in the center armrest of

cardiagn.com
the rear console. Rear cooler
Information Information
WARNING WARNING
A folded-out folding table protrudes into The cover of the opened cooler pro‐
the vehicle's interior and, in case of accident, trudes into the car's interior. Injuries can occur
braking or evasive maneuvers can cause inju‐ in the event of an accident, braking or evasive
ries. Objects on the table can be thrown maneuver. The content of the cooler can be
around the car's interior while driving. There is thrown into the car's interior and injure occu‐
risk of injuries. Do not unfold or use folding ta‐ pants. There is risk of injuries. Close the cooler
ble while driving.◀ after use when driving.◀

Folding the folding table open Opening the rear cooler

1. Open the center armrest, refer to 1. Fold down the center armrest.
page 227.
2. Opening the through-loading system, refer
2. Grasp the folding table in the rear and pull to page 222.
forward out from the center armrest.
3. Press the opener and fold the cover for‐
ward.

223
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Interior equipment

Switching on 2. Pull on the rear handle and push the cooler

The cooler can be operated at two levels. into the guide rails.

1. Turn on operations.

2. Press button once for each cooling

level.
The highest cooling power is active when
two LEDs are lit.
If the cooler was switched on the last time op‐
erating readiness was switched off, it will like‐
wise be switched on the next time operating
3. Fold the handle back again.
readiness is switched on.
Malfunction
Switch off
The cooler cannot be switched on or switches
Press button repeatedly until the LEDs go out.
off, e.g., when the cooling system overheats or

cardiagn.com
if the battery voltage is low. One of the LEDs
Removing flashes.
1. Pull on the rear handle.
2. Pull cooler backward and remove it. Remedy the problem
1. If necessary, allow the refrigerator cooling
system to cool down.
2. Start the engine.
3. Switch on cooler.
If the LED flashes even after a short time, have
the cooler checked by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.

3. Fold the cover back.

Ski and snowboard bag
Installing
The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a
1. Open the cover.
protective jacket in the trunk.
Follow the installation and operation instruc‐
tions included in the protective jacket.
If equipped with emergency wheel: remove the
emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount
the ski and snowboard bag.

224
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Storage compartments Controls

Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment in the rear, refer to
page 227.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
specific and optional features offered with the
console, refer to page 226.
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front
the selected options or country versions. This seats.
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the Glove compartment
respective features and systems.
Front passenger side

Information Information

cardiagn.com
WARNING WARNING

Loose objects in the car's interior can be Folded open, the glove compartment
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
in the event of an accident or during braking glove compartment can be thrown into the
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐ car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐ an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
rior.◀ neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close
the glove compartment immediately after us‐
CAUTION ing it.◀
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is risk of prop‐ Opening
erty damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀

Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the vehicle interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 225.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, Pull the handle.
refer to page 226.
The light in the glove compartment switches
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to on.
page 226.
▷ Storage compartment on the center con‐
Closing
sole, refer to page 226.
Fold cover closed.
▷ Center armrest, refer to page 227.

225
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Storage compartments

Locking risk of injuries. Do not stow any breakable ob‐

The glove compartment can be locked with an jects in the car's interior.◀
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ Storage compartment on the
mote control can be handed over, such as at a center console
hotel, without the integrated key.
Opening
Driver's side

Information
WARNING
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
glove compartment can be thrown into the

cardiagn.com
car's interior while driving, e.g. in the event of
an accident or during braking and evasive ma‐
neuvers. There is risk of injuries. Always close Push the cover forward until it engages behind
the glove compartment immediately after us‐ the cup holders. Push the cover forward again
ing it.◀ until it engages behind the storage compart‐
ment.
Opening
Closing
Touch the cover on the handle bar. It slides up
to the cup holders toward the back. Another
touch closes the storage compartment com‐
pletely.

Storage compartment in the

rear center console
Pull the handle.
The rear center console contains a storage
compartment.
Closing
Fold cover closed.

Compartments in the doors

WARNING
Breakable object, e.g. glass bottle, can
break in the event of an accident. Broken glass
can be scattered in the car's interior. There is

226
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Storage compartments Controls

Storage compartment in the Closing

rear Press cover down until it engages.

Opening Rear

Overview
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.

Opening
Depending on the equipment, one of the fol‐
lowing variants is installed:

Push the cover up until it engages. There is a

storage compartment underneath.

cardiagn.com
Closing
Press the cover upward to close it. The cover
slides down.

Press button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,

Center armrest arrow 2.
Front

Overview
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.

Opening

Press button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up,

arrow 2.

Press button.

227
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Storage compartments

2. Two cupholders are located in the center

console.

Press button.

Closing
Press cover down until it engages.
Rear

Information
Cupholders CAUTION

cardiagn.com
With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
Information rest cannot be folded back up. There is risk of
WARNING property damage. Press back the covers be‐
fore the center armrest is folded up.◀
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
and increase the risk of injuries in the event of Opening
an accident. There is risk of injuries or risk of If not equipped with rear console:
property damage. Use light-weight, unbreaka‐
ble, and sealable containers. Do not transport
hot beverages. Do not force objects into the
cup holder.◀

Front

Opening
1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐
hind the cup holders. Press button to open.
Slide cup holders rearward to close.

If equipped with rear console:

228
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Storage compartments Controls

Storage compartments in the

trunk
Multi-function hook

Information
WARNING
Improper use of the multifunction hooks
Slide cover rearward to open. can lead to a danger of objects flying about
To close: slide the cover backward. The cover during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
slides forward. is risk of injuries and risk of property damage.
Only hang lightweight objects, e.g. shopping
bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only
transport heavy luggage in the trunk if it has
Clothes hooks been appropriately secured.◀

cardiagn.com
WARNING
Overview
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing
articles from the hooks, ensure that they will
not obstruct the driver's view.◀

WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a danger of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is risk
of injuries and risk of property damage. Only A multi-function hook is located on the left
hang lightweight objects, e.g. clothing articles, side in the trunk. Press on the multi-function
from the clothes hooks.◀ hook and turn until it engages.
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐
dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the Storage compartment on the right
rear. side
A storage compartment is available on the
right side of the cargo area.

229
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Controls Storage compartments

Left side storage compartment

Pull the handle.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 238, there
are lashing eyes in the cargo area.

cardiagn.com
Storage compartment below cargo
floor panel
There is a storage compartment under the
cargo floor panel.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.

230
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Storage compartments Controls

cardiagn.com

231
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 cardiagn.com

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and

cardiagn.com
operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Drive conservatively for the first
specific and optional features offered with the
200 miles/300 km.
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
Brake system
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐
systems. The respectively applicable country prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐
provisions must be observed when using the formance between brake discs and brake
respective features and systems. pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐
riod.

Breaking-in period Following part replacement

cardiagn.com
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
General information served if any of the components above-men‐
Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
other (break-in time). vehicle's operating life.

The following instructions will help accomplish

a long vehicle life and good efficiency.
General driving notes
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐
trol, refer to page 109. Closing the trunk lid

Engine, transmission, and axle drive WARNING

An open trunk lid protrudes from the ve‐
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km hicle and can endanger occupants and other
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
speed: event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
the vehicle interior. There is risk of injuries or
100 mph/160 km/h.
risk of property damage. Do not drive with the
Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ trunk lid open.◀
stances.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km avoided:

The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
increased. ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents.
▷ Drive moderately.
Tires
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;

234
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Hot exhaust system transmission. There is risk of property damage.

When driving through water, do not exceed the
WARNING
maximum indicated water level and the maxi‐
During driving operation, high tempera‐ mum speed for driving through water.◀
tures can occur underneath the body, e.g.
caused by the exhaust gas system. If combus‐ Drive through calm water only and only if it is
tible materials, such as leaves or grass, come not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this
in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas height, no faster than walking speed, up to
system, these materials can ignite. There is 3 mph/5 km/h.
risk of injuries or risk of property damage.
Do not remove the heat shields installed and
Braking safely
never apply undercoating to them. Make sure Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
that no combustible materials can come in ard feature.
contact with hot vehicle parts in driving opera‐ Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
tion, idle or during parking. Do not touch the way of braking in situations needed.
hot exhaust system.◀ Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid

cardiagn.com
any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
Mobile communication devices in the fort.
vehicle Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
WARNING the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones active mode.
can influence one another. There is radiation In certain braking situations, the perforated
due to the send operations of mobile phones. brake discs can cause functional problems.
There is risk of injuries or risk of property dam‐ However, this has no effect on the perform‐
age. If possible, in the car's interior use only ance and operational reliability of the brake.
mobile phones with direct connections to an
exterior antenna in order to exclude mutual Objects in the movement area around
disturbance and deflect the radiation from the pedals and floor area
car's interior.◀ WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
Hydroplaning the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal.
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in
form between the tires and road surface. the vehicle such that they are secured and
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
loss of contact between the tires and the road can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
surface, ultimately undermining your ability to loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
steer and brake the vehicle. mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
Driving through water are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀
CAUTION
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the engine
compartment, the electrical system or the

235
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Driving in wet conditions Corrosion will built up when the maximum

When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, pressure applied to the brake pads during
press brake pedal ever so gently every few braking is not reached - thus discs don't get
miles. cleaned.

Ensure that this action does not endanger Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
other traffic. a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
sponse - generally that cannot be corrected.
The heat generated in this process helps dry
the brake discs and pads.
Condensation under the parked
In this way braking efficiency will be available vehicle
when you need it.
When using the automatic climate control,
condensation water develops collecting under‐
Hills neath the vehicle.
WARNING These traces of water under the vehicle are
Light but consistent brake pressure can normal.
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out

cardiagn.com
and possibly even brake failure. There is risk of
an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on
the brake system.◀

WARNING
In idle or with the engine switched off,
safety-relevant functions are restricted or not
available anymore, e.g. braking effect of the
engine or braking force and steering support.
There is risk of an accident. Do not drive in idle
or with the engine switched off.◀

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the

gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐
wise the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency.
You can increase the engine's braking effect
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear,
if needed.

Brake disc corrosion

Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
tion on the brake pads are furthered by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
▷ Low mileage.
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.

236
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Loading Driving tips

Loading
Vehicle features and options or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the
vehicle and unstable driving situations
This chapter describes all standard, country- may result.
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.

Information 2. Determine the combined weight of the

cardiagn.com
driver and passengers that will be riding in
WARNING your vehicle.
High gross weight can overheat the tires, 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
damage them internally, and cause a sudden and passengers from XXX kilograms or
drop in tire inflation pressure. There is risk of YYY pounds.
an accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed the 4. The resulting figure equals the available
permitted gross weight.◀ amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
pacity.
CAUTION For example, if the YYY amount equals
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐ 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs
age. There is risk of property damage. Make passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.◀ available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs =
WARNING 400 lbs.
Loose objects in the car's interior can be 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
thrown into the car's interior while driving, e.g. gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
in the event of an accident or during braking cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
and evasive maneuvers. There is risk of inju‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
ries. Secure loose objects in the car's inte‐ calculated in Step 4.
rior.◀

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐
hicle’s placard:
▷ The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed XXX kg

237
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving tips Loading

Load Securing cargo

WARNING
Improperly stowed objects can shift and
be thrown into the car's interior, e.g. in the
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is risk of injuries. Stow and
secure objects and cargo properly.◀

▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐

taining straps or with a cargo net or draw
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of straps.
the occupants and the cargo.
▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with
The greater the weight of the occupants, the cargo straps.
less cargo that can be transported.
Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining
straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in

cardiagn.com
the trunk.
Stowing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ Information
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
Installation only possible in roof drip molding
the rear passenger seat backrests.
with flaps. Further information is available from
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not a dealer’s service center or another qualified
occupied, secure each of the outer safety service center or repair shop.
belts in the opposite buckle.
Roof racks are available as special accessories.

Securing
Securing cargo
Follow the installation instructions of the roof
rack.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
Roof drip rail with flaps

To secure the cargo there are four lashing

eyes in the cargo area.
The anchorage points are located in the roof
drip rail above the doors.

238
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Loading Driving tips

Fold the cover outward.

Mounting
Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained
for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Magnetic roof-mounted luggage rack

Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roof-
mounted luggage racks cannot be used.

Loading
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center
of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐
fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐
sponse.

cardiagn.com
Therefore, note the following when loading
and driving:
▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
▷ The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie
with ratchet straps.
▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
path of the trunk lid.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.

239
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving tips Saving fuel

Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass
This chapter describes all standard, country- sunroof
specific and optional features offered with the Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
series. It also describes features that are not open results in increased air resistance and
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to raises fuel consumption.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
Tires
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐
General information

cardiagn.com
sumption.
Your vehicle contains advanced technology for
the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ Check the tire inflation pressure
sions. regularly
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ starting on a long trip.
erate driving style and regular maintenance, Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ronmental impact. tire wear.

Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away without delay

Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove attached parts This is the quickest way of warming the cold
following use engine up to operating temperature.

Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage

racks which are no longer required following
use.
Look well ahead when
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
driving
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.

240
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Saving fuel Driving tips

Avoid high engine speeds reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
Switch off these functions if they are not
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
needed.
If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator,
The ECO PRO driving program supports the
refer to page 120, of the vehicle.
energy conserving use of comfort features.
These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
Use coasting conditions
When approaching a red light, take your foot
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to Have maintenance carried
a halt. out
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve
erator and let the vehicle roll.
optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. BMW recommends that maintenance work be

cardiagn.com
performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
For information on the BMW Maintenance
Switch off the engine during System, refer to page 279.
longer stops
Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g.,
at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic ECO PRO
congestion.
The concept
Auto Start/Stop function ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
automatically switches off the engine during a gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐
stop. mate control output, are adjusted.

If the engine is switched off and then restarted Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ matically decoupled from the transmission in
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
onds of switching off the engine. duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position
D remains engaged.
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style, In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
road conditions, maintenance or environmental displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
factors. sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
Switch off any functions that
are not currently needed Overview
The system includes the following
Functions such as seat heating and the rear EfficientDynamics functions and displays:
window defroster require a lot of energy and
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 243.

241
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving tips Saving fuel

▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to ▷ "ECO PRO seat climate control"
page 243. ▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to ▷ "ECO PRO sight"
page 242.
▷ "Route-ahead assistant"
▷ ECO PRO route-ahead assistant driving in‐
struction, refer to page 244. Coasting
▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
page 245. ing the engine and Coasting with the engine
▷ ECO PRO driving style analysis, refer to idling.
page 246.
ECO PRO seat heating
Activating ECO PRO The output of seat heating and possibly seat
Press button. ECO PRO is displayed ventilation is reduced on activation of ECO
in the instrument cluster. PRO.

cardiagn.com
ECO PRO climate control
Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
"ECO PRO climate control"
Opening via the Driving Dynamics Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
Control By making a slight change to the set tempera‐
1. Activate ECO PRO. ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or
2. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption
can be economized.
Opening via iDrive The mirror heating is made available when out‐
1. "My Vehicle" side temperatures are very cold.

2. "Vehicle settings"
Route-ahead assistant
3. "Driving Experience Control" The route-ahead assistant detects and indi‐
4. "Configure ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" cates route sections ahead of the vehicle.

ECO PRO notes Resetting the settings

Activate the ECO PRO limit: Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
"ECO PRO speed warning" settings:
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of Select and confirm "Reset to ECO PRO
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded. STANDARD".
Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ "Tip at:"
Display
Activating ECO PRO functions
When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display
Adjust, which ECO PRO functions should be switches to a special configuration.
used.
Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐
▷ "Coasting" play in the instrument cluster.

242
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Saving fuel Driving tips

Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo‐ Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐
nus range in stages. celerating.

ECO PRO bonus range ECO PRO tip, driving tip

An adjusted driving style helps As soon as one of the conditions for efficient
you extend your driving range. driving is no longer fulfilled, respective driving
instructions are displayed as a symbol in the
This may be displayed as the
instrument cluster.
bonus range in the instrument
cluster. The arrow indicates that the driving
The bonus range is shown in the range display. style can be adjusted to be more fuel
efficient by backing off the accelerator
The bonus range is automatically reset every
for instance.
time the vehicle is refueled.
The ECO PRO tip is not displayed anymore as
soon as the conditions for efficient driving are
Efficiency display fulfilled again.

cardiagn.com
Display in the instrument cluster
ECO PRO tip, symbols

Symbol Measure

For an efficient driving style:

Give less gas, decelerate in advance
or reduce speed to selected ECO
PRO speed.

Steptronic transmission: shift from

M/S to D.
Display in the instrument cluster with ex‐
panded scope
Indications on the Control Display

Displaying EfficientDynamics info

The current efficiency of the ECO PRO sys‐
tems can be shown on the Control Display.

1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "EfficientDynamics"
The following systems are displayed:
A mark in the efficiency display informs about ▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
the current driving style.
▷ Energy recovery.
Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
▷ Coasting.
ergy recovered by coasting or when braking.

243
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving tips Saving fuel

Displaying fuel consumption history Depending on the situation, the system also
The average consumption on the route uses the engine brake automatically with a
coasted as well as the duration for which the pausing of the coast, refer to page 245, func‐
auto start/stop function switched off the en‐ tion.
gine can be displayed.
Functional requirements
1. "My Vehicle"
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
2. "Technology in action"
The system depends on the timeliness and
3. "EfficientDynamics" quality of the navigation data.
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ The navigation data can be updated.
lected route.
Display
Selecting route length
Display in the instrument cluster
1. Press button.
The note about a route section ahead
2. Select desired route length or scaling.

cardiagn.com
is made as recommendation to let the
vehicle coast to a halt.
Resetting fuel consumption history
An additional symbol indicates the detected
1. Press button. route section.
2. "Reset consumption history" Symbol Upcoming route section

Route-ahead assistant Intersection or turning maneuver,

exit from an expressway.
The concept
Curve.
The system helps to conserve fuel and pro‐
motes a proactively driving style. It can detect
certain upcoming sections of the journey
based on the navigation data and alert the Traffic circle.
driver to them in good time.
The detected route sections, such as built-up
areas or changes of road require the driver to Display in the Head-up Display
reduce speed.
The route ahead alert can also be dis‐
played in the Head-Up Display.
General information
This alert is issued even if the upcoming route
section cannot yet be detected while driving.
The alert is displayed until the route section is
reached.
If an alert is received, the vehicle's speed and
its fuel consumption can be reduced by back‐
ing off the accelerator and coasting until the
route section is reached.

244
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Saving fuel Driving tips

Indications on the Control Display To do this, under certain conditions the engine
is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
lever position D remains engaged.
This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
In the indicator of the driving style analysis again.
shown on the Control Display, a note is dis‐
played if a corresponding route section is up‐ Information
coming. Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐
fer to page 241, driving mode.
Call up the display of the driving style analysis:
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO

cardiagn.com
1. "My Vehicle" PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
2. "Technology in action" Control.

3. "Driving style analysis" The function is available in a certain speed

range.
Using the route-ahead assistant A proactively driving style helps the driver to
An upcoming route section is displayed: use the function as often as possible and sup‐
ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
1. Back off the accelerator.
2. Allow the vehicle to coast until the route Safety mode
section indicated is reached. The function is not available under one of the
3. If necessary, adjust speed by braking. following conditions.
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
System limits ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on
The system is not available in the following sit‐ steep uphill or downhill grades.
uations:
▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low
▷ Speed less than 30 mph, approx. 50 km/h. or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐
▷ Temporary and variable speed limit, e.g., sive current.
for road works.
▷ Quality of navigation data inadequate. Functional requirements
▷ Cruise control active. In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in
a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐
prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if
Coasting
the following conditions are met:
The concept ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not
The system helps to conserve fuel. operated.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.

245
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Driving tips Saving fuel

▷ Engine and transmission are at operating

temperature.
The driving status Coast can be influenced
with the shift paddles.
Activate coasting via the shift paddles:

1. Using the shift paddles + shift to the high‐

est gear.
2. Shift paddles + press again to enter coast‐
ing mode. Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2:
Deactivate coasting: driving condition Coasting.

Press shift paddles.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info
Display 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
Display in the instrument cluster

cardiagn.com
3. "EfficientDynamics"
The mark in the efficiency dis‐
play below the tachometer is Deactivating the system manually
backlit in blue and is located at
The function can be deactivated individually on
the zero point. The tachometer
the ECO PRO menu.
approximately indicates idle
speed. The setting is stored for the drive profile cur‐
rently used.
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at
the zero point during coasting.
ECO PRO driving style analysis

Display in the instrument cluster with The concept

expanded scope In this situation the system helps develop an
The mark in the efficiency dis‐ especially efficient driving style and to con‐
play is backlit in blue and is lo‐ serve fuel.
cated at the zero point. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The coasting point indicator is il‐ The assessment is done in various categories
luminated at the zero point dur‐ and is displayed on the Control Display.
ing coasting. Using this indication, the individual driving
style can be oriented toward conserving fuel.
Indications on the Control Display The current trip is assessed.
The Coasting driving condition is displayed in The range of the vehicle can be extended by
EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode an efficient driving style.
is active. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.

246
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Saving fuel Driving tips

Functional requirement
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.

Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "Driving style analysis"

Display on the Control Display

cardiagn.com
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐
ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient the driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a wavy road and a reduced number of
stars is displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.

247
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 cardiagn.com

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,

cardiagn.com
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Mobility Refueling

Refueling
Vehicle features and options 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise.

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Information

cardiagn.com
CAUTION
With a range of less than 30 miles/50 km
it is possible that the engine will no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are no longer
ensured. There is risk of property damage. Re‐
fuel promptly.◀

Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to

page 252, prior to refueling.
Closing
1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you
Fuel lid clearly hear a click.
Opening 2. Close the fuel filler flap.
1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler WARNING
flap. The retaining strap of the fuel cap be
jammed and crushed during closing. In this
case, the lid cannot be correctly closed and
fuel vapors or fuel can escape. There is risk of
injuries or risk of property damage. Pay atten‐
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed or
crushed when closing the lid.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E. g. in the event of an electrical malfunction.

250
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Refueling Mobility

The release is located in the trunk.

1. Remove the cover on the right side trim.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump

symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

cardiagn.com
Observe the following when
refueling
CAUTION
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. On contact with painted surfaces, dam‐
age may occur to these surfaces. The
environment is polluted. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid overfilling.◀
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Observe safety regulations posted at the gas
station.

251
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Fuel

Fuel
Vehicle features and options CAUTION
Even small amounts of wrong fuel or
This chapter describes all standard, country-
wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐
specific and optional features offered with the
tem and the engine. Furthermore, the catalytic
series. It also describes features that are not
converter is permanently damaged. There is
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add
the selected options or country versions. This
the following in the case of gasoline engines:
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Leaded gasoline.
provisions must be observed when using the ▷ Metallic additives, e.g. manganese or iron.
respective features and systems. Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
ing the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s service
center or another qualified service center or re‐
Fuel recommendation

cardiagn.com
pair shop.◀

General information Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of

25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refuel‐
Depending on the region, many gas stations
ing.
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in Ethanol should satisfy the following quality
winter helps make a cold start easier, e.g. standards:
US: ASTM 4806–xx
Information CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx
CAUTION xx: comply with the current standard in each
Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ case.
tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ CAUTION
gine problems, for instance poor engine start-
Wrong fuels can damage the fuel system
up behavior, poor handling and/or poor
and the engine. There is risk of property dam‐
performance. There is risk of property damage.
age. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol
In case of engine problems, switch gas sta‐
percentage than recommended or one with
tions or use a brand name fuel with a higher
other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100.◀
octane rating.◀

Recommended fuel grade

Gasoline
BMW recommends AKI 91.
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐
tent.
Minimum fuel grade
BMW recommends AKI 89.
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐
taining metal must not be used. CAUTION
Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
mum quality can compromise engine function
or cause engine damage. There is risk of prop‐

252
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Fuel Mobility

erty damage. Do not fill with fuel that does not

comply with the minimum quality.◀
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result
in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐
ommend switching to a high quality gasoline

cardiagn.com
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀

253
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Only check the tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after driving no more
This chapter describes all standard, country- than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has
specific and optional features offered with the been parked for at least 2 hours.
series. It also describes features that are not
The displays of inflation devices may under-
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
read by up to 0.1 bar, 2 psi.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire
systems. The respectively applicable country inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire
provisions must be observed when using the Monitor.
respective features and systems. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the
tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure
Monitor.
Tire inflation pressure

cardiagn.com
Tire inflation pressure specifications
Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ page 255, contains all tire inflation pressure
sure influence the following: specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
▷ The service life of the tires. ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
▷ Road safety. manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
▷ Driving comfort. type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
Checking the tire inflation pressure please note the following:
WARNING ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
A tire with low or missing tire inflation ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
pressure impacts handling, such as steering
and braking response. There is risk of an acci‐ Tire inflation pressures up to
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ 100 mph/160 km/h
sure, and correct it as needed, e.g. twice a
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for
month and before a long trip.◀
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
emergency wheel in the trunk regularly, and to page 255, and adjust as necessary.
correct it as needed.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
flation pressure.
Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐
tion pressure increases along with the tire's
temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐
fications relate to cold tires or tires with the
ambient temperature.

254
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 21 3.0 / 44 -

96 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 275/30 R 21
98 Y XL RSC

Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of

These pressure values can also be found on T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's M 4.2 / 60
door pillar.
Tire inflation pressures at max.
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
Tire inflation pressure values up to WARNING
100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in

cardiagn.com
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe,
740Li, 750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
Tire size Pressure specifications relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
in bar/PSI wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold Tire inflation pressure values over
tires 100 mph/160 km/h

740Li, 750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive

245/50 R 18 100 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 Without high-speed tuning feature
M+S A/S RSC
Tire size Pressure specifications
245/50 R 18 100 H
in bar/PSI
M+S RSC
Specifications in
245/45 R 19 102 V 2.4 / 35 2.6 / 38
bar/PSI with cold
M+S XL A/S RSC
tires
245/45 R 19 102 V
M+S XL RSC
245/50 R 18 100 V 2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39
Front: 245/45 R 19 2.5 / 36 -
M+S A/S RSC
98 Y RSC - 2.5 / 36
245/50 R 18 100 H
Rear: 275/40 R 19
M+S RSC
101 Y RSC
245/45 R 19 102 V 2.7 / 39 2.9 /42
Front: 245/40 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
M+S XL A/S RSC
99 Y XL RSC - 2.7 / 39
245/45 R 19 102 V
Rear: 275/35 R 20
M+S XL RSC
102 Y XL RSC

255
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI

Front: 245/45 R 19 2.5 / 36 - Front: 3.0 / 44 -

98 Y RSC - 2.5 / 36 245/40 R 20 99 Y - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 275/40 R 19 XL RSC
101 Y RSC Rear: 275/35 R 20
102 Y XL RSC
Front: 245/40 R 20 2.7 / 39 -
99 Y XL RSC - 2.7 / 39 Front: 3.3 / 48 -
Rear: 275/35 R 20 245/35 R 21 96 - 3.3 / 48
102 Y XL RSC Y XL RSC
Rear: 275/30 R 21
Front: 245/35 R 21 3.0 / 44 -
98 Y XL RSC
96 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44
Rear: 275/30 R 21 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
98 Y XL RSC T 135/80 R 18 50 mph / 80 km/h

cardiagn.com
104 M 4.2 / 60
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
T 135/80 R 18 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
Tire identification marks
With high-speed tuning feature Tire size
Tire size Pressure specifications 245/45 R 18 96 Y
in bar/PSI 245: nominal width in mm
Specifications in 45: aspect ratio in %
bar/PSI with cold R: radial tire code
tires
18: rim diameter in inches
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
245/50 R 18 100 2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39 Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
H M+S RSC

245/45 R 19 102 2.9 /42 3.1 / 45 Speed letter

V M+S XL RSC Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h

Front: 2.7 / 39 - R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h

245/45 R 19 98 Y - 2.7 / 39 S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h
RSC T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h
Rear: 275/40 R 19 H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h
101 Y RSC
V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h

256
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire Identification Number ing habits, service practices and differences in

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115 road characteristics and climate.

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

Traction
xxx: tire size and tire design
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
0115: tire age are AA, A, B, and C.
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of Those grades represent the tire's ability to
the U.S. Department of Transportation. stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
Tire age test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the marked C may have poor traction performance.
1st week of 2015. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
Recommendation and does not include acceleration, cornering,
Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
least every 6 years.

cardiagn.com
Temperature
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Quality grades can be found where applicable and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and maximum section width. heat when tested under controlled conditions
For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Temperature A Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
DOT Quality Grades
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger
Traction AA A B C car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Temperature A B C Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band
A represent higher levels of performance on
All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐
eral Safety Requirements in addition to these
quired by law.
grades.
WARNING
Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
ernment test course. For example, a tire in combination, can cause heat buildup and
graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, possible tire failure.◀
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100. The relative performance of RSC – Run-flat tires
tires depends upon the actual conditions of
Run-flat tires, refer to page 260, are labeled
their use, however, and may depart signifi‐
with a circular symbol containing the letters
cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐
RSC marked on the sidewall.

257
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

M+S Information
Winter and all-season tires with better cold Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces,
weather performance than summer tires. as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur
Tire tread with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
Summer tires careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than
with low-profile tires.
0.12 in/3 mm.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐
There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if
functions:
the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm.
▷ Unusual vibrations while driving.
Winter tires ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐
Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than dency to pull to the left or right.

cardiagn.com
0.16 in/4 mm. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over
Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are curbs, road damage, or similar things.
less suitable for winter operation. WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
Minimum tread depth
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
control. There is risk of an accident. If tire dam‐
age is suspected while driving, immediately re‐
duce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires
checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to
the nearest dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop. Have
vehicle towed or transported as needed.◀

WARNING
Wear indicators are distributed around the Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. control. There is risk of an accident. Do not re‐
pair damaged tires, but have them replaced.◀
They are marked on the side of the tire with
TWI, Tread Wear Indicator.
Changing wheels and tires
Tire damage Mounting
Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
General information
out by a dealer’s service center or another
Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign qualified service center or repair shop.
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear.

258
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Wheels and tires Mobility

Wheel and tire combination New tires

You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐ Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
other qualified service center or repair shop ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
about the right wheel/tire combination and they achieve their full traction potential after a
wheel rim versions for the vehicle. break-in time.
Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair Drive conservatively for the first
the function of a variety of systems such as 200 miles/300 km.
ABS or DSC.
To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ Retreaded tires
sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
figuration from a single manufacturer. ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Following tire damage, have the original wheel WARNING
and tire combination remounted on the vehicle
Retreated tires can have different tire
as soon as possible.
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
WARNING ice life can be limited. There is risk of an acci‐

cardiagn.com
Wheels and tires which are not suitable dent. Do not use retreated tires.◀
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐
cle, e. g. due to contact with the body due to Winter tires
tolerances despite the same official size rating. Winter tires are recommended for operating on
There is risk of an accident.◀ winter roads.
WARNING Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
Mounted steel wheels can cause techni‐
they do not provide the same level of perform‐
cal problems, e.g. independent loosening of
ance as winter tires.
the lug bolts, damage to the brake discs. There
is risk of an accident. Do not mount steel
wheels.◀
Maximum speed of winter tires
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires,
Recommended tire brands
then a respective symbol is displayed in your
field of vision. The plate is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
With mounted winter tires, observe and adhere
to the permissible maximum speed.

Run-flat tires
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your
own safety you should replace them only with
For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ the same kind. No spare tire is available in the
hicle recommends certain tire brands. These case of a flat tire. A dealer’s service center or
can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. another qualified service center or repair shop
will be glad to answer additional questions at
any time.

259
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

Rotating wheels between axles Changing run-flat tires

Different wear patterns can occur on the front For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No
and rear axles depending on individual driving spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. A
conditions. The tires can be rotated between dealer’s service center or another qualified
the axles to achieve even wear. A dealer’s service center or repair shop will be glad to an‐
service center or another qualified service cen‐ swer additional questions at any time.
ter or repair shop will be glad to answer addi‐
tional questions at any time. After rotating,
check the tire pressure and correct if needed. Repairing a flat tire
Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐
cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the Safety measures
front and rear axles. ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Storage ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
as little exposure to light as possible.

cardiagn.com
setting the parking brake.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
grease and fuels.
wheels are in the straight-ahead position
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ and engage the steering wheel lock.
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
Run-flat tires such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
Label
appropriate distance.

Mobility System
The concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed quickly to enable continued
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the
RSC label on the tire sidewall. inside.
The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ The compressor can be used to check the tire
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ inflation pressure.
cial rims.
The support of the sidewall allows the tire to Information
remain drivable to a restricted degree in the ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
event of a tire inflation pressure loss. lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
Follow the instructions for continued driving
with a flat tire.

260
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Wheels and tires Mobility

▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ Compressor

tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 in/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies
that have penetrated the tire.
▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
wheel. 1 Bottle unlocking
▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM 2 Holder for bottle
wheel electronics. In this case, have the 3 Inflation pressure dial
electronics checked at the next opportu‐
4 Reduce inflation pressure
nity and have them replaced if needed.
5 On/off switch

cardiagn.com
Storage 6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose

Filling the tire with sealant

1. Shake the sealant container.

The mobility system is in the left storage com‐

partment of the cargo area.

Sealant container

▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant container.

261
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

2. Pull filling hose completely out of the cover 5. With the compressor switched off, insert
of the sealant container. Do not kink the the plug into the power socket inside the
hose. vehicle.

3. Slide the sealing container into the holder 6. With operating readiness switched on or
on the compressor housing, ensuring that the engine running, switch on the com‐
it engages audibly. pressor.

cardiagn.com
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐ DANGER
tainer onto the tire valve of the nonworking If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
wheel. tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain carbon monoxide, an odorless and color‐
less but highly toxic gas. In enclosed areas, ex‐
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the
exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventila‐
tion.◀

CAUTION
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is risk of property
damage. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 min.◀

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to

fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.

262
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Wheels and tires Mobility

While the tire is being filled with sealant, the To correct the tire inflation pressure
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach 1. Stop at a suitable location.
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐
sor at this point.
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:

1. Switch off the compressor.

2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel.
3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
3. Insert the connector into the power socket
ter or another qualified service center or
inside the vehicle.
repair shop.

cardiagn.com
Stowing the Mobility System
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the wheel.
2. After pressing the red unlock button on the
compressor, remove the sealing container.
3. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐
ble material to avoid dirtying the trunk.
4. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
cle. least 2.0 bar.
▷ Increase pressure: with operating read‐
Distributing the sealant
iness switched on or the engine run‐
Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ ning, switch on the compressor.
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐
tire.
ton on the compressor.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than Continuing the trip
12 mph/20 km/h. Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System as soon as
possible.

263
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

Snow chains are mounted. For this, it is possible to confirm

via iDrive that snow chains are mounted.
Fine-link snow chains
Information
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of WARNING
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the When rear wheel steering is switched on
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended and snow chains are mounted, there can be
as road-safe and suitable. contact between snow chains and the chassis.
Information regarding suitable snow chains is There is risk of accidents or risk of property
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐ damage. With mounted snow chains, switch
other qualified service center or repair shop. off the rear wheel steering.◀

Use Switching off rear wheel steering

Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped With the setting that snow chains are
with the tires of the following size: mounted, the rear wheel steering is switched

cardiagn.com
▷ 245/50 R 18. off.
▷ 245/45 R 19. About iDrive:
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
tions.
2. "Vehicle settings"
Make sure that the snow chains are always
3. "Tire chains"
sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐
ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. 4. "Tire chains installed"
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after Starting with the permissible maximum speed
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear
in incorrect readings. wheel steering will be switched on automati‐
cally.
Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after
mounting snow chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
Dynamic Traction Control if needed.
The concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
Maximum speed with snow chains
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h if there is a loss of pressure in one or more
when using snow chains. tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire
valves measure the tire inflation pressure and
Rear wheel steering during operation tire temperature.
with snow chains
Information
General information
With use of the system observe further infor‐
In order to guarantee free running of the mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐
wheels when operating with snow chains, the fer to page 254.
rear wheel steering of the integral active steer‐
ing must be switched off when snow chains

264
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Wheels and tires Mobility

Functional requirements Status information

The system must have been reset with the The status control display additionally shows
correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
not assured. shows the actual values read; they may vary
Reset the system after each adjustment of the depending on driving style or weather condi‐
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or tions.
wheel change.
Carry out reset
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
ensure that the system will operate properly. Reset the system after each adjustment of the
tire inflation pressure and after every tire or
Status display wheel change.

The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ Via iDrive and in the vehicle:
tor TPM can be displayed, e.g., whether or not 1. "My Vehicle"
the TPM is active.
2. "Vehicle status"

cardiagn.com
About iDrive:
3. Tire Pressure Monitor reset
1. "My Vehicle" 4. Start the engine - do not drive off.
2. "Vehicle status" 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" reset".
The status is displayed. 6. Drive away.
The wheels are displayed in gray and the sta‐
Status control display tus "Resetting Tire Pressure Monitor…" is dis‐
Tire and system status are indicated by the played.
color of the wheels and a text message on the After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
Control Display. short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
All wheels green completed automatically while driving.
System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ After a successfully completed Reset, the
tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during wheels on the Control Display are shown in
the last reset. green and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. For
recommended pressures, see tire pressure
One to four wheels, yellow label." is displayed.
A flat tire or major drop in tire inflation pressure You may interrupt this trip at any time. When
in the indicated tires. you continue the reset resumes automatically.

Wheels, gray Messages

The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons
for this may be: Required tire inflation pressure check
▷ The system is being reset. message
▷ Malfunction. A Check Control message is displayed.

265
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

▷ The system has detected a wheel change, A symbol with the affected tires will be dis‐
but no reset was done. played in the Check Control message.
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire in‐
The system therefore issues a warning
flation pressure.
based on the tire inflation pressures before
the last reset. ▷ No reset was performed for the system.
The system therefore issues a warning
▷ Inflation was not carried out according to
based on the tire inflation pressures before
specifications.
the last reset.
▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below
In these cases:
the level of the last reset.
In these cases: 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as vers.
needed.
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
2. Reset the system. normal tires or run-flat tires.

cardiagn.com
Run-flat tires, refer to page 260, are la‐
Message in case of low tire pressure beled with a circular symbol containing the
The yellow warning lamp lights up. letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
WARNING

A Check Control message is displayed. A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run-
▷ There is a tire inflation pressure loss. flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
▷ No reset was performed for the system.
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
The system therefore issues a warning
Observe the information on run-flat tires and
based on the tire inflation pressures before
continued driving with these tires.◀
the last reset.
In these cases: A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC
Dynamic Stability Control.
1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of Actions in the event of a flat tire
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, e.g. gas station, Normal tires
check and if necessary correct the tire in‐ 1. Identify the damaged tire.
flation pressure in all four tires.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
3. Reset the system. four tires.
The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility
Message in case of sharp tire inflation
System, refer to page 260, can be used for
pressure loss
this purpose.
The yellow warning lamp lights up.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is shown to be correct, it is possible that
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform
a reset. Then perform the reset.

266
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Wheels and tires Mobility

If identification of flat tire damage is not neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
possible, please contact a dealer’s service potholes, etc.
center or another qualified service center Because the possible driving distance de‐
or repair shop. pends on how the vehicle is used during the
2. Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐
Mobility System. ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
3. Replacing a damaged tire, where applica‐ ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
ble with the emergency wheel. WARNING
Use of sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, may Your vehicle handles differently when a
damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
case, have the electronics checked at the next tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
opportunity and have them replaced if needed. reduced when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will
Run-flat tires change. There is risk of an accident.
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
Maximum speed

cardiagn.com
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
System limits
Continued driving with a flat tire The system does not function properly if a re‐
set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
reported though tire inflation pressures are
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ correct.
vers. The tire inflation pressure depends on the
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus
the next opportunity. increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire
inflation pressure is reduced when the tire
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires temperature falls again. These circumstances
is shown to be correct, it is possible that may cause a warning when temperatures fall
the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform very sharply.
a reset. In that case, carry out a reset.
The system cannot indicate sudden serious
Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire damage caused by external circumstances.
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire Malfunction
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
ing style and road conditions.
then lights up continuously. A Check
A vehicle with an average load has a possible Control message is displayed. No flat
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ tected.
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving ing situations:
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted, e.g. emergency wheel: Have it

267
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐ cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐
other qualified service center or repair ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐
shop as needed. tor is combined with the low tire pressure
▷ Malfunction: Have system checked by a telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
dealer’s service center or another qualified tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one
service center or repair shop. minute and then remain continuously illumi‐
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐
Reset the system again.
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
▷ Interference through systems or devices is illuminated, the system may not be able to
with the same radio frequency: After leav‐ detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
ing the area of the interference, the system TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
automatically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels

cardiagn.com
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
flated to the inflation pressure recommended to continue to function properly.
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size FTM Flat Tire Monitor
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the The concept
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring tween the individual wheels while driving.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the corresponding wheel changes. This will be
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
detected and reported as a flat tire.
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ The system does not measure the actual infla‐
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tion pressure in the tires.
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ Functional requirements
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the The system must have been initialized when
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, tion of the tire inflation pressure and after
even if under-inflation has not reached the every tire or wheel change.
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐

268
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Wheels and tires Mobility

Status display Run-flat tires, refer to page 260, are la‐

The current status of the flat tire monitor can beled with a circular symbol containing the
be displayed, e.g., whether the RPA is active. letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.

About iDrive: WARNING

1. "My Vehicle" A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐

ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
2. "Vehicle status" such as steering and braking response. Run-
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
The status is displayed. risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires.
Initialization Observe the information on run-flat tires and
continued driving with these tires.◀
When initializing the once set inflation tire
pressures serve as reference values in order to When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐
detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ bility Control is switched on if needed.
firming the tire inflation pressures.

cardiagn.com
Do not initialize the system when driving with System limits
snow chains. A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all
About iDrive: four tires will not be recognized. Therefore,
check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
1. "My Vehicle"
Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐
2. "Vehicle status" nal circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐
3. Flat Tire Monitor reset vance.
4. Start the engine - do not drive off. The system could be delayed or malfunction in
5. Start the initialization: "Perform reset" the following situations:

6. Drive away. ▷ When the system has not been initialized.

The initialization is completed while driving, ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
which can be interrupted at any time. surface.

The initialization automatically continues when ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
driving resumes. wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
▷ When driving with snow chains.
Indication of a flat tire
The yellow warning lamp lights up. A
Actions in the event of a flat tire
Check Control message is displayed.
Normal tires
There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire
1. Identify the damaged tire.
inflation pressure.
Do this by checking the air pressure in all
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. four tires.
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ The tire pressure gauge of the Mobility
vers. System, refer to page 260, can be used for
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with this purpose.
normal tires or run-flat tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not

269
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Wheels and tires

have been initialized. In this case, initialize ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐
the system. ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc.
If identification of flat tire damage is not WARNING
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
Your vehicle handles differently when a
center or another qualified service center
run-flat tire is damaged and has low or missing
or repair shop.
tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is
2. Fix the flat tire using the Mobility System, reduced when braking, braking distances are
refer to page 260. longer and the self-steering properties will
change. There is risk of an accident.
Run-flat tires Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
Final tire failure
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
Continued driving with a flat tire cate the final failure of a tire.

cardiagn.com
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ dent.
vers.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. service center or another qualified service cen‐
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at ter or repair shop.
the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Possible driving distance with complete loss of
tire inflation pressure:
The possible driving distance after a loss of tire
inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐
ing style and road conditions.
A vehicle with an average load has a possible
driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km.
A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐
ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during
braking, a longer braking distance and different
self-steering properties. Adjust your driving
style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐
neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs,
potholes, etc.
Because the possible driving distance de‐
pends on how the vehicle is used during the
trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐

270
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Engine compartment Mobility

Engine compartment
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Important features in the engine comp.

1
2
Washer fluid reservoir
Jump-starting, positive battery terminal
5
cardiagn.com
Gasoline engine only: coolant reservoir, air
conditioning

3 Oil filler neck 6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

4 Coolant reservoir, engine 7 Vehicle identification number

271
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Engine compartment

Hood Opening the hood

1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
Information Hood is unlocked.
WARNING
Improperly executed work in the engine
compartment can damage components and
lead to a safety risk. There is risk of accidents
or risk of property damage.◀

WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents can move in the engine compartment
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
with the vehicle switched off, e.g. the cooler
again, arrow 2.
fan. There is risk of injuries. Do not reach into
the area of moving parts. Keep articles of Hood can be opened.

cardiagn.com
clothing and hair away from moving parts.◀ 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

CAUTION Closing the hood

Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀

WARNING
There are protruding parts, e.g. lock
hook, on the inside of the hood. There is risk of
injuries. If the hood is open, pay attention to Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16
protruding parts and keep these areas clear.◀ in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully.
The hood must audibly engage on both sides.
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is risk
of an accident. Stop immediately and correctly
close the hood.◀

WARNING
Body parts can be jammed on opening
and closing the hood. There is risk of injuries.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
hood is clear during opening and closing.◀

272
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Engine oil Mobility

Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Electronic oil measurement
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Status display
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
The concept
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This The engine oil level is monitored electronically
also applies to safety-related functions and while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐
systems. The respectively applicable country play.
provisions must be observed when using the If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
respective features and systems. level, a check control message is displayed.

Requirements
General information

cardiagn.com
A current measured value is available after ap‐
prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip
the driving style and driving conditions.
is displayed.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
With frequent short-distance trips, regularly
the following situations, for example:
perform a detailed measurement.
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine. Displaying the engine oil level
▷ Idling of the engine. About iDrive:
▷ With use of engine oil types that are not 1. "My Vehicle"
approved.
2. "Vehicle status"
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
3. "Engine oil level"
after refueling.
4. "Measure engine oil level"
The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil
measurement. The engine oil level is displayed.
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
uring principles: Engine oil level display messages
Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐
▷ Status display
play depending on the engine oil level. Pay at‐
▷ Detailed measurement tention to these messages.
If the engine oil level is too low within the next
125 miles/200 km, add engine oil, refer to
page 274.
CAUTION
A too low engine oil level causes engine
damage. There is risk of property damage. Im‐
mediately add engine oil.◀

273
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Engine oil

Take care not to add too much engine oil. Adding engine oil
CAUTION
Information
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of CAUTION
property damage. Do not add too much engine A too low engine oil level causes engine
oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a damage. There is risk of property damage.
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Add engine oil within the next
service center or repair shop.◀
125 miles/200 km.◀

Detailed measurement CAUTION

Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
The concept gine or the catalytic converter. There is risk of
In the detailed measurement the engine oil property damage. Do not add too much engine
level is checked and displayed via a scale. oil. Have too much engine oil siphoned off by a
Gasoline engine: dealer’s service center or another qualified

cardiagn.com
service center or repair shop.◀
If the engine oil level reaches the minimum
level, a check control message is displayed. WARNING
Diesel engine: Operating materials, e.g. oils, greases,
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredi‐
creased somewhat. ents. There is risk of injuries or danger to life.
Observe the instructions on the containers.
General information Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or
eyes with operating materials. Do not refill op‐
A detailed measurement is only possible with
erating materials into different bottles. Store
certain engines.
operating materials out of reach of children.◀
Requirements
▷ Vehicle is on level road. General information
Establish idle state and safely park the vehicle
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N
before engine oil is added.
or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ Overview
perature.
The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
partment, refer to page 271.
Performing a detailed measurement
About iDrive: Opening the oil filler neck
1. "My Vehicle" Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
2. "Vehicle status" played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
3. "Measure engine oil level"
played in the instrument cluster.
4. "Start measurement"
1. Opening the hood, refer to page 272
The engine oil level is checked and displayed
via a scale.
Time: approx. 1 minute.

274
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Engine oil Mobility

2. Turn the oil filler neck counter-clockwise, Gasoline engine

arrow.
BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

BMW Longlife-14 FE+.

The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only

suitable for particular gasoline motors.
More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
3. Add motor oil. quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.

Engine oil types to add Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is

cardiagn.com
Information not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
CAUTION
added:
Oil additives can damage the engine.
There is risk of property damage. Do not use Gasoline engine
oil additives.◀
API SL or superior oil rating.
CAUTION
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐
tions in the engine or damage it. There is risk Engine oil change
of property damage. When selecting an engine
CAUTION
oil, make sure that the engine oil has the cor‐
rect viscosity grade.◀ Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of thus engine damage. There is risk of property
the engine. damage. Do not exceed the service data indi‐
cated in the vehicle.◀
Viscosity grades
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the
you let the dealer’s service center or another
engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity
qualified service center or repair shop change
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40,
the motor oil.
SAE 5W-30, 0W-20 or 5W-20.
The viscosity grades 0W-20 and 5W-20 are
only suitable for particular engines.

Suitable engine oil types

Add engine oils that meet the following oil rat‐
ing standards:

275
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Engine oil

cardiagn.com

276
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Coolant Mobility

Coolant
Vehicle features and options els of both coolant reservoirs and refill as
needed.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
The coolant level is indicted using minimum
specific and optional features offered with the
and maximum markings. Depending on the
series. It also describes features that are not
coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
markings are located at different locations.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
Overview
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the Opening the hood, refer to page 272
respective features and systems. Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment, refer to
Information page 271.

cardiagn.com
WARNING
Checking the coolant level in the filler
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐ neck
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to 1. Let the engine cool.
burns. There is risk of injuries. Only open the
cooling system with the engine cooled down.◀ 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
WARNING pressure to dissipate, then open it.
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐ 3. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
tives can damage the engine. There is risk of 4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
injuries and risk of property damage. Avoid the tween the minimum and maximum marks
contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with in the filler neck.
additives. Do not swallow any additives. Use
suitable additives only.◀

Coolant consists of water and additives.

Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.

Coolant level Adding

1. Let the engine cool.
General information 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
Vehicles with gasoline engine feature two counterclockwise to allow any excess
cooling circuits. Always check the coolant lev‐ pressure to dissipate, then open it.

277
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Coolant

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up

to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
nated as soon as possible.

Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.

cardiagn.com

278
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Maintenance Mobility

Maintenance
Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control
Information on the required maintenance is
This chapter describes all standard, country-
continuously stored in the remote control. The
specific and optional features offered with the
dealer’s service center can read this data out
series. It also describes features that are not
and suggest an optimized maintenance scope
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
for your vehicle.
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
systems. The respectively applicable country control with which the vehicle was driven most
provisions must be observed when using the recently.
respective features and systems.
Storage periods
Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐

cardiagn.com
count.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
erational reliability of the vehicle. update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
In some cases scopes and intervals may vary necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
according to the country-specific version. Re‐ crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐
cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐
rately. Further information is available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
Service and Warranty
service center or repair shop. Information Booklet for US
models and Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Condition Based Service Canadian models
CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
count the driving conditions of your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐
nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements.
The system makes it possible to adapt the The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
amount of maintenance corresponding to your that maintenance and repair be performed by a
user profile. dealer’s service center or another qualified
Detailed information on service requirements, service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐
refer to page 119, can be displayed on the lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
Control Display. tained.

279
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Maintenance

Socket for OBD Onboard trol components, in particular the catalytic

converter.
Diagnosis
Information
CAUTION
Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis can lead to vehicle malfunctions.
There is risk of property damage. The manu‐
facturer of your vehicle strongly recommends
access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be
limited to a dealer's service center, another
qualified service center or repair shop or other
authorized persons.◀

Position

cardiagn.com
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for
checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.

Emissions
▷ The warning lamp lights up:
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain
circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐

280
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Replacing components Mobility

Replacing components
Vehicle features and options CAUTION
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
This chapter describes all standard, country-
when the hood is opened. There is risk of
specific and optional features offered with the
property damage. Make sure that the wipers
series. It also describes features that are not
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
down onto the windshield before opening the
the selected options or country versions. This
hood.◀
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the Replacing the front wiper blades
respective features and systems. 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer
to page 105, the wiper arms.
2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐
Onboard vehicle tool kit

cardiagn.com
shield.

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the 3. Press button, arrow 1, and pull out the
left storage compartment of the cargo area. wiper blade, arrow 2.

Wiper blade replacement

Information
CAUTION
If the wiper arm falls onto the windshield
without the wiper blades installed, the wind‐
shield can be damaged. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Secure the wiper arm when re‐ 4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on
placing the wiper blades and do not fold down until it you hear it snap into the holder.
the wipers without the wiper blades installed.◀ 5. Fold down the wipers.

281
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Replacing components

Lights and bulbs densation evaporates after a short time. The

headlight glass does not need to be changed.
General information If despite driving with the lights switched on,
Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets
tion to vehicle safety. in the lamp, the manufacturer of your vehicle
recommends having it checked by a dealer’s
All headlights and lights are made using LED
service center or another qualified service cen‐
or laser technology.
ter or repair shop.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you let a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop perform
Changing wheels
the work in case of a malfunction.
Information
Information
When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire
does not need to be changed immediately in
Lights and bulbs
the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire.

cardiagn.com
DANGER
The tools for changing wheels are available as
There can be high voltage in the lighting accessories from your dealer’s service center
system. There is danger to life. The manufac‐ or another qualified service center or repair
turer of your vehicle recommends that the shop.
work on the lighting system including bulb re‐
placement be performed by a dealer’s service Jacking points for the vehicle jack
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.◀

Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source.
These light-emitting diodes, which are related
to conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
WARNING cated at the positions shown.
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is risk of Emergency wheel
injuries. Do not look directly into the headlights
or other light sources for an extended period of Safety measures
time. Do not remove the LED covers.◀ ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
Headlight glass Switch on the hazard warning system.
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ ▷ Set the parking brake and engage lever in
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When position P P.
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐

282
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Replacing components Mobility

▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the

vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place,
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or
portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid
and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐
pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the 1. Remove the cargo floor panel. To do this,
vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the pull the floor upward directly behind the
side. rear backrests.
▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items 2. Loosen the lashing straps.
under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot 3. Remove tool holder.
reach its carrying capacity because of the 4. Remove emergency wheel.
restricted height.

cardiagn.com
▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the Prepare wheel change
vehicle and do not start the engine; other‐ 1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to
wise, a fatal hazard exists. page 283.
2. With the wheel chock from the onboard ve‐
Information
hicle tool kit, also secure the vehicle
WARNING against rolling away at the front wheel of
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the opposite side. For this, place the wheel
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the chock behind the front wheel diagonally
vehicle only. There is risk of injuries. Do not lift across.
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle 3. Switching off the air suspension, refer to
jack.◀ page 200.
4. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn.
Removing the emergency wheel
The emergency wheel and the tools are lo‐ Jacking up the vehicle
cated in the trunk under the cargo floor panel. 1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel such that the vehicle
jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle

283
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Replacing components

jacking point with the entire surface on the Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
ground. 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐
sible.

Driving with emergency wheel

WARNING
The emergency wheel has particular di‐
mensions. When driving with an emergency
wheel, changed driving properties may occur
2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐
at higher speeds, e.g. reduced lane stability
gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐
when braking, longer braking distance and
ing it up.
changed self-steering properties in the limit
3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts area. There is risk of an accident. Drive moder‐
off of the ground.

cardiagn.com
ately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Wheel mounting
Mount one emergency wheel only.

1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove Vehicle battery

the wheel.
Maintenance
2. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two bolts. The battery is maintenance-free.
If original BMW light alloy wheels are not The added amount of acid is sufficient for the
mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also service life of the battery.
have to be used. More information about the battery can be re‐
3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern. other qualified service center or repair shop.
4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle
Battery replacement
jack.
CAUTION
After the wheel change Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐ can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm. cle functions.There is risk of property damage.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the trunk. Information on the compatible vehicle batteries
is available at your dealer's service center.◀
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its After a battery replacement, the manufacturer
size. of your vehicle recommends that the vehicle
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ battery be registered on the vehicle by a
portunity and correct as needed. dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop to ensure that all
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
comfort features are fully available and that any

284
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Replacing components Mobility

Check Control messages of these comfort fea‐ Disposing of old batteries

tures are no longer displayed.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
Charging the battery qualified service center or repair shop
or take them to a collection point.
General information
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐
transport and storage. Secure the battery so
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery
that it does not tip over during transport.
remains usable for its full service life.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐
lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
Fuses
drives.
Information
▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐
riods, longer than a month. WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload

cardiagn.com
Information electrical lines and components. There is risk
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse
CAUTION
and do not replace a nonworking fuse with a
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery substitute of another color or amperage rat‐
can work with high voltages and currents, ing.◀
which means that the 12V on-board network
can be overloaded or damaged. There is risk of
In the trunk
property damage. Only connect battery charg‐
ers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid
terminals in the engine compartment.◀

Starting aid terminals

In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
starting aid terminals, refer to page 288, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure
Remove the cover on the right side trim, arrow.
After a temporary power loss, some equipment
needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐ Information on the fuse types and locations is
tings updated, e. g.: found on a separate sheet.
▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory:
store the positions again.
▷ Time: update.
▷ Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system, refer to
page 75.

285
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Breakdown assistance

Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Overview

This chapter describes all standard, country-

specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to
the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country
provisions must be observed when using the
respective features and systems.
SOS button in the roofliner.

Hazard warning flashers

cardiagn.com
Requirements
▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ Operating readiness is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.

The button is located in the center console. Initiating an Emergency Request

1. Touch the cover.
2. Press the SOS button and hold until the
Intelligent Emergency LED on the microphone lights up green.
Request ▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency
Request was initiated.
The concept If a cancel prompt appears on the display,
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ the Emergency Request can be aborted.
quest can be made through this system. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle
until the voice connection has been estab‐
General information lished.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request to the BMW Response Center has been
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐ established.
ditions. When the emergency request is received
at the BMW Response Center, the BMW

286
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Breakdown assistance Mobility

Response Center contacts you and takes First-aid kit

further steps to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the Information
BMW Response Center can take further Some of the articles have a limited service life.
steps to help you under certain circum‐
Check the expiration dates of the contents
stances.
regularly and replace any expired items
For this, data are transmitted to the BMW promptly.
Response Center which serve to deter‐
mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g. Storage
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
be established.
▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW
Response Center can no longer be heard
via the speaker, you can nevertheless still
be heard at the BMW Response Center.

cardiagn.com
Initiating an Emergency Request
automatically
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐
The first-aid kit is located in the left storage
quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐
compartment of the cargo area.
ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐
fication is not affected by pressing the SOS
button.
Jump-starting
Warning triangle General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
bles with fully insulated clamp handles.

Information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is risk of injuries or
The warning triangle is located on the inside of danger to life. Do not touch any components
the trunk lid. that are under voltage.◀
Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the
To prevent personal injury or damage to both
cover down, arrow 2.
vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
dure.

287
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Breakdown assistance

Preparation
CAUTION
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is risk of property dam‐
age. Make sure that no body contact occurs.◀
1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐
mation can be found on the battery. A special nut serves as the negative terminal of
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ the battery.
cle.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power Connecting the cables
consumers in both vehicles. Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary
electronic systems/power consumers, such as
Starting aid terminals the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehi‐

cardiagn.com
WARNING cles.
If the jumper cables are connected in the 1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal.
incorrect order, sparks formation can occur. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
There is risk of injuries. Pay attention to the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
correct order during connection.◀ battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ or body ground of assisting vehicle.
gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
tive terminal. negative terminal of the battery, or to the
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. corresponding engine or body ground of
the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle

and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.

288
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Breakdown assistance Mobility

If the first starting attempt is not success‐ Tow truck

ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge if needed.

Tow-starting and towing The vehicle should only be transported on a

loading platform.
Information
WARNING Towing other vehicles
Due to system limits, individual functions

cardiagn.com
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing Information
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated, WARNING
e.g. approach control warning with light brak‐ If the approved gross vehicle weight of
ing function. There is risk of an accident. the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
tow-starting/towing.◀ not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is risk of an accident! Make sure
Transporting the vehicle that the gross vehicle weight of the towing ve‐
hicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.◀
Information
CAUTION
CAUTION
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐ correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is occur. There is risk of property damage. Cor‐
risk of property damage. The vehicle should rectly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow
only be transported on a loading platform.◀ fitting.◀
CAUTION ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐
When lifting the vehicle by the tow fitting pending on local regulations.
or body and chassis parts; damage can occur ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly
on vehicle parts. There is risk of property dam‐ identify the vehicle being towed by placing
age. Lift vehicle using suitable means.◀ a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐
dow.
CAUTION
With transport on a loading platform, do Tow bar
not fasten vehicle by the chassis.◀
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.

289
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Breakdown assistance

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe vehicle and screw it all the way in.
the following: ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going roads only.
around corners. ▷ Use tow fitting located in the front only for
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it positioning the vehicle.
is secured with an offset. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g.,
do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting.
Tow rope
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure Screw thread for tow fitting
that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses
on the vehicle components when towing, al‐
ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps.

Tow fitting

cardiagn.com
General information

Push out the cover by pressing on the top

edge.

Tow-starting

Steptronic transmission
Do not tow-start the vehicle.

The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
ried in the vehicle. the transmission.

The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.
or rear of the BMW.
The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle
tool kit, refer to page 281.

Information
CAUTION
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
there can be damage to the vehicle or to the
tow fitting. There is risk of property damage.
Observe the notes on using the tow fitting.◀

Use of the tow fitting:

290
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Care Mobility

Care
Vehicle features and options ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 inches/80 cm.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
specific and optional features offered with the Automatic car washes
series. It also describes features that are not
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Information
the selected options or country versions. This
Note the following:
also applies to safety-related functions and
systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or
provisions must be observed when using the those that use soft brushes in order to
respective features and systems. avoid paint damage.
▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not
damaged by the transport mechanisms.
Car washes

cardiagn.com
▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they
may be damaged, depending on the width
General information of the vehicle.
Regularly remove foreign objects such as ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to
leaves in the area below the windshield when page 104, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐
the hood is raised. vation.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ be triggered by the interior motion sensor
age the vehicle. of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐
tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm,
Steam blaster and high-pressure refer to page 70.
washer
CAUTION
Information Too high guide rails in car washes can
damage body parts. There is risk of property
CAUTION
damage. Avoid car washes with guide rails
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐ higher than 4 in/10 cm.◀
ers, components can be damaged due to the
pressure or temperatures being too high.
Before driving into a car wash
There is risk of property damage. Maintain suf‐
ficient distance and do not spray too long con‐ In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a
tinuously. Follow the user's manual for the car wash, take the following steps:
high-pressure washer.◀ 1. Drive into the car wash.
2. Engage selector lever position N.
Distances and temperature
3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. page 102.
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, 4. Release the parking brake.
seals: 12 in/30 cm.
5. Switch off drive readiness.

291
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Care

In this way, operating readiness remains Vehicle care

switched on, and a Check-Control mes‐
sage is displayed. Car care products
The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
when in selector lever position N. A signal using car care and cleaning products from
sounds when an attempt is made to lock the BMW.
vehicle.
WARNING
For activation of drive readiness:
Cleansers can contain substances that
1. Depress the brake pedal. are dangerous and harmful to your health.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. There is risk of injuries. When cleaning the in‐
terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
When the Start/Stop button is pressed without
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
stepping on the brake, a Check Control mes‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
sage is displayed.

Selector lever position Vehicle paint

cardiagn.com
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ Regular care contributes to driving safety and
gaged after approx. 25 minutes. value retention. Environmental influences in
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
Headlights taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or
quency and extent of your car care to these
acidic cleansers.
influences.
▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g.,
Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
from insects, with shampoo and wash off
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
with water.
mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an tered or discolored.
ice scraper.
Matte finish
After washing the vehicle
Only use cleaning and care products suitable
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes for vehicles with matte finish. These are availa‐
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action ble from a dealer’s service center or another
can be reduced and corrosion of the brake qualified service center or repair shop.
discs can occur.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐ Leather care
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to Remove dust from the leather often, using a
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and cloth or vacuum cleaner.
wiper blade wear.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, provide leather care roughly every
two months.

292
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Care Mobility

Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ Rubber components

cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially Environmental influences can cause surface
more visible. soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. For
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and cleaning, use only water and suitable care
grease will gradually break down the protective products, the manufacturer of your vehicle rec‐
layer of the leather surface. ommends original BMW care products.
Suitable care products are available from a Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
dealer’s service center or another qualified care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
service center or repair shop. rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
car care products in order to avoid damage or
Upholstery material care noises.
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.
Fine wood parts
If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage
stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
with a suitable interior cleaner. nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.

cardiagn.com
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the
Plastic components
material vigorously.
These include:
CAUTION
▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
▷ Roofliner.
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is
risk of property damage. Ensure that any Vel‐ ▷ Lamp lenses.
cro® fasteners are closed.◀ ▷ Instrument cluster cover.
▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
Caring for special components ▷ Painted parts in the interior.
Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Light-alloy wheels
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral Dampen cloth lightly with water.
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not soak the roofliner.
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam CAUTION
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐
turer's instructions. Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent plastic parts. There is risk of property damage.
components, such as the brake disk. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen cloth
lightly with water.◀
Chrome surfaces
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐
Safety belts
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
ularly when they have been exposed to road thus have a negative impact on safety.
salt.

293
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Mobility Care

WARNING Displays/screens/protective glass of

Chemical cleansers can destroy the the Head-up Display
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect CAUTION
of the safety belts. There is risk of injuries or
Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution
any kind can damage the surface of displays
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
and screens. There is risk of property damage.
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.◀
belts clipped into their buckles.
CAUTION
Do not allow the switchs to retract the safety
belts until they are dry. The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is risk of prop‐
erty damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
Carpets and floor mats
and do not use any scratching materials.◀
WARNING
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐

cardiagn.com
There is risk of an accident. Stow objects in play, refer to page 126, using a microfiber cloth
the vehicle such that they are secured and and commercially available dish-washing soap.
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and Long-term
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor three months, special measures must be
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐ taken. Further information is available from a
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats dealer’s service center or another qualified
are securely fastened again after they were re‐ service center or repair shop.
moved, e.g. for cleaning.◀

Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐

rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.

294
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Care Mobility

cardiagn.com

295
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 cardiagn.com

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information

cardiagn.com
you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15

 Reference Technical data

Technical data
Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This
also applies to safety-related functions and
This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country
specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the
series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems.
necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

Information
The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on labels on
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, service center or another qualified service cen‐
for example, due to the selected special equip‐ ter or repair shop.

cardiagn.com
ment, country version or country-specific The information in the vehicle documents al‐
measurement method. Detailed values can be ways has priority.

Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐
measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

BMW 7 Series Sedan

Width with mirrors inches/mm 85.4/2,169

Width without mirrors inches/mm 74.9/1,902

Height inches/mm 57.8/1,467

Height L-models inches/mm 58.2/1,479

Length inches/mm 201.2/5,108

Length L-models inches/mm 206.6/5,248

Wheelbase inches/mm 120.9/3,070

Wheelbase L-models inches/mm 126.4/3,210

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.1/12.5

Smallest turning radius diam. L-models ft/m 42-42.4/12.8-12.9

298
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Technical data Reference

Weights

Canada only: 750i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,705/2,588

Load lbs/kg 960/435

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,840/1,288

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,060/1,388

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft 18.2

Canada: trunk capacity cu ft/l 18.2/515

cardiagn.com
740Li

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,450/2,472

Load lbs/kg 960/435

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,585/1,173

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,030/1,374

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft 18.2

Canada: trunk capacity cu ft/l 18.2/515

750Li xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,870/2,663

Load lbs/kg 960/435

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,900/1,315

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,140/1,424

Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100

Cargo area capacity cu ft 18.2

Canada: trunk capacity cu ft/l 18.2/515

299
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Reference Technical data

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. 20.6/78 Fuel quality, refer to

page 252

cardiagn.com

300
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Appendix Reference

Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.

cardiagn.com

301
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Reference Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z
Index
A Air circulation, see Recircu‐ Attentiveness assistant 161
lated-air mode 205 AUC Automatic Recirculating
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ Air, dehumidifying, see Cool‐ Air Control 205
tem 163 ing function 204 Audio 6
ACC, Active Cruise Control Air distribution, manual 205 AUTO H button 100
with Stop & Go 168 Air flow, automatic climate AUTO H button, see Auto‐
Acceleration Assistant, see control 205 matic Hold 100
Launch Control 106 Air outlets, see ventila‐ AUTO intensity 204
Accessories and parts 7 tion 206 Automatic car wash 291
Accident prevention, see Ac‐ Air pressure, tires 254 Automatic climate con‐
tive Protection 160 Air suspension 200 trol 203

cardiagn.com
Activated-charcoal filter 206 Alarm system 69 Automatic Cruise Control
Activating gesture control 30 Alarm, unintentional 70 with Stop & Go 168
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ All around the center con‐ Automatic Curb Monitor 85
tion 153 sole 16 Automatic deactivation,
Active comfort chassis 201 All around the roofliner 18 Front-seat passenger air‐
Active Cruise Control with All around the steering bags 138
Stop & Go, ACC 168 wheel 14 Automatic headlight con‐
Active damping adjust‐ All-season tires, see Winter trol 130
ment 201 tires 259 Automatic Hold 100
Active Protection 160 All-wheel-drive, see Automatic locking 68
Active roll stabilization 202 xDrive 165 Automatic Recirculating Air
Active seat ventilation 92 Alternating-code hand-held Control AUC 205
Active Steering, integral 166 transmitter 216 Automatic Soft Closing,
Adaptive brake assistant 163 Alternative oil types 275 doors 63
Adaptive brake lights, see Ambient air package 211 Automatic transmission, see
Brake force display 160 Ambient light 133, 134 Steptronic transmis‐
ADAPTIVE drive mode, see Animal detection, see Night sion 106
Driving Dynamics Con‐ Vision 147 Automatic unlocking 68
trol 110 Antifreeze, washer fluid 106 AUTO program, automatic cli‐
Adaptive Light Control 131 Antilock Brake System, mate control 204
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dy‐ ABS 163 AUTO program, intensity 204
namics Control 110 Anti-slip control, see Auto Start/Stop function 98
Additives, oil 275 DSC 163 Average fuel consump‐
Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Approved axle load 299 tion 124
straints 76 Arrival time 124 Average speed 124
After washing vehicle 292 Ashtray 217 Axle loads, weights 299
Airbags 136 Ashtray, front 217
Airbags, indicator/warning Ashtray, rear 218
light 137 Assistance when driving
off 163

302
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Everything from A to Z Reference

B Brightness of Control Dis‐ Carpet, care 294

play 39 Cartridge replacement, see
Backrest curvature, see Lum‐ Bulb replacement 282 Ambient air package 211
bar support 77 Bulb replacement, front 282 Car wash 291
Backrest, seats 76 Bulb replacement, front Catalytic converter, see Hot
Backrest, width 77 lamps 282 exhaust system 235
Band-aids, see First-aid Bulb replacement, rear 282 CBS Condition Based Serv‐
kit 287 Bulb replacement, tail ice 279
Bar for tow-starting/ lamps 282 Center armrest 227
towing 289 Bulbs and lights 282 Center console 16
Basic position, rear seats 80 Button, Start/Stop 97 Central locking system 63
Battery replacement, vehicle Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ Central screen, see Control
battery 284 ing 287 Display 21
Battery replacement, vehicle Changes, technical, see Own
remote control 55 C Safety 7
Battery, vehicle 284 Changing parts 281
Being towed, see tow-start‐ California Proposition 65 Changing wheels 282

cardiagn.com
ing/towing 289 Warning 8 Changing wheels/tires 258
Belts, safety belts 80 Calling up mirror adjust‐ Chassis number, see vehicle
Beverage holder, cu‐ ment 68 identification number 10
pholder 228 Calling up seat adjust‐ Check Control 114
Blinds, sun protection 72 ment 68 Checking the engine oil level
Bluetooth connection 42 Calling up steering wheel ad‐ electronically 273
BMW Assist 6 justment 68 Checking the oil level elec‐
BMW display key 55 Camera-based damping ad‐ tronically 273
BMW Driver’s Guide App 6 justment 201 Children, seating position 93
BMW gesture control 30 Camera lenses, care 294 Children, transporting
BMW Homepage 6 Camera, rearview camera, safely 93
BMW Internet page 6 without Surround View 184 Child restraint fixing sys‐
BMW maintenance sys‐ Camera, see Surround tem 93
tem 279 View 187 Child restraint fixing system
BMW Touch Command 36 Can holder, see Cu‐ LATCH 95
Bonus range, ECO PRO 243 pholder 228 Child restraint fixing systems,
Bottle holder, see Cu‐ Captain’s chair 89 mounting 94
pholder 228 Car battery 284 Child safety locks 96
Brake assistant 163 Car care products 292 Child seat, mounting 94
Brake assistant, adaptive 163 Care, displays 294 Child seats 93
Brake discs, break-in 234 Care, vehicle 292 Chrome parts, care 293
Brake force display 160 Cargo 237 Cigarette lighter 218
Brake lights, adaptive 160 Cargo area, storage compart‐ Cleaning displays 294
Brake lights, brake force dis‐ ments 229 Climate control 203
play 160 Cargo, securing 238 Climate control on roof‐
Brake pads, break-in 234 Cargo straps, securing liner 209
Braking, hints 235 cargo 238 Clock 118
Breakdown assistance 286 Car key, see Remote con‐ Closing the trunk lid with no-
Break-in 234 trol 54 touch activation 66

303
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Reference Everything from A to Z

Closing via door lock 62 ConnectedDrive 6 Defrosting, see Windows, de‐

Closing without remote con‐ ConnectedDrive Services 6 frosting 206
trol 62 Connecting device 41 Dehumidifying, air 204
Clothes hooks 229 Connecting electrical devi‐ Deleting personal data 40
Coasting 245 ces 219 Deletion of personal data 40
Coasting with engine decou‐ Connecting mobile phone 41 Departure time, parked-car
pled, coasting 245 Connecting smartphone 41 heating 211
Coasting with idling en‐ Connecting telephone 41 Departure time, parked-car
gine 245 Connections 41 ventilation 211
Collision warning with braking Continued driving with a flat Destination distance 124
function 140 tire 267, 270 Device list 41
Collision warning with City Control Display 21 Digital clock 118
braking function 140 Control Display, settings 38 Dimensions 298
Combination switch, see Turn Controller 22 Dimmable exterior mirrors 86
signals 103 Control systems, driving sta‐ Dimmable interior rearview
Combination switch, see bility 163 mirror 86
Wiper system 103 Convenient opening with the Direction indicator, see Turn

cardiagn.com
Comfort Access 65 remote control 61 signals 103
COMFORT drive mode, see Coolant 277 Display in windshield 126
Driving Dynamics Con‐ Coolant level 277 Display lighting, see Instru‐
trol 110 Coolant temperature 118 ment lighting 133
COMFORT PLUS drive Cooler 223 Displays 113
mode, see Driving Dynamics Cooling function 204 Displays, cleaning 294
Control 110 Cooling, maximum 204 Disposal, coolant 278
COMFORT PLUS, see Driv‐ Cooling system 277 Disposal, vehicle battery 285
ing Dynamics Control 110 Corrosion on brake discs 236 Distance control, see
COMFORT, see Driving Dy‐ Cosmetic mirror 217 PDC 180
namics Control 110 Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ Distance to destination 124
Communication 6 cle locked 61 Divided screen view, split
Compact wheel, see Emer‐ Cross traffic warning 197 screen 27
gency wheel 282 Cruise control 175 Door handle lighting, see wel‐
Compartments in the Cruise control, active with come lights 130
doors 226 Stop & Go 168 Door lock 62
Compatible devices 42 Cruising range 123 Door lock, see Remote con‐
Compatible mobile Cupholder 228 trol 54
phones 42 Current fuel consump‐ Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐
Compressor 260 tion 123 ing 63
Computer, see on-board Downhill control 165
computer 122 D Drive mode 110
Condensation on win‐ Drive-off assistant 163
dows 206 Damage, tires 258 Drive-off assistant, see
Condensation under the vehi‐ Damping control, dy‐ DSC 163
cle 236 namic 201 Drive readiness, see starting
Condition Based Service Data, technical 298 the engine 97
CBS 279 Daytime running lights 131 Driving Dynamics Con‐
Confirmation signal 68 trol 110

304
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Everything from A to Z Reference

Driving instructions, break- Emergency detection, remote ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐
in 234 control 55 gram, see DSC 163
Driving notes, general 234 Emergency release, fuel filler Exchanging wheels/tires 258
Driving stability control sys‐ flap 250 Executive Drive Pro 201
tems 163 Emergency Request 286 Exhaustion warner 161
Driving style analysis 246 Emergency start function, en‐ Exhaust system 235
Driving tips 234 gine start 55 Exterior lighting during un‐
DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ Emergency unlocking, trans‐ locking 60
trol 163 mission lock 106 Exterior mirror, automatic
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Emergency unlocking, trunk dimming feature 86
trol 164 lid 65 Exterior mirrors 85
Dynamic Damping Con‐ Emergency wheel 282 External start 287
trol 201 Energy control 123 External temperature dis‐
Dynamic Stability Control Energy recovery 123 play 118
DSC 163 Engine, automatic Start/Stop External temperature warn‐
Dynamic Traction Control function 98 ing 118
DTC 164 Engine, automatic switch-on/ Eyes for securing cargo 238

cardiagn.com
off 98
E Engine compartment 271 F
Engine compartment, work‐
ECO PRO 241 ing in 272 Failure message, see Check
ECO PRO, bonus range 243 Engine coolant 277 Control 114
ECO PRO display 241 Engine idling when driving, False alarm, see Unintentional
ECO PRO drive mode, see coasting 245 alarm 70
Driving Dynamics Con‐ Engine oil 273 Fan, see Air flow 205
trol 110 Engine oil, adding 274 Filler neck for engine oil 274
ECO PRO driving mode 241 Engine oil additives 275 Fine wood, care 293
ECO PRO driving style analy‐ Engine oil change 275 First-aid kit 287
sis 246 Engine oil filler neck 274 Fitting for towing, see tow-
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive Engine oil temperature 118 starting/towing 289
mode, see Driving Dynamics Engine oil types, suitable 275 Flat tire, changing
Control 110 Engine start during malfunc‐ wheels 282
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see tion 55 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 268
Driving Dynamics Con‐ Engine start, jump-start‐ Flat tire, repairing 260
trol 110 ing 287 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
ECO PRO mode 241 Engine start, see drive readi‐ tor TPM 264
ECO PRO, route-ahead assis‐ ness 97 Flat tire, warning
tant 244 Engine stopping, see drive lamp 266, 269
ECO PRO, see Driving Dy‐ readiness 97 Flooding 235
namics Control 110 Engine temperature 118 Floor carpet, care 294
ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ Entering a car wash 291 Floor mats, care 294
struction 243 Entertainment 6 Folding table in the rear 223
Electronic oil measure‐ Equipment, interior 215 Fold-out position, wiper 105
ment 273 Error displays, see Check Foot brake 235
Electronic Stability Program Control 114 Fragrance cartridge, see Am‐
ESP, see DSC 163 bient air package 211

305
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Reference Everything from A to Z

Fragrance, see Ambient air Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ Hot exhaust system 235
package 211 proved 299 HUD Head-up Display 126
Fragrancing, see Ambient air Hydroplaning 235
package 211 H
Front airbags 136 I
Front center armrest 227 Handbrake, see Parking
Front cupholder 228 brake 100 iBrake — Post Crash 161
Front fog lights 132 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ Ice warning, see External
Front passenger seat, adjust‐ nating code 216 temperature warning 118
ing 78 Hand movement 30 Icy roads, see External tem‐
Front-seat passenger airbags, Hazard warning flashers 286 perature warning 118
automatic deactivation 138 HDC Hill Descent Con‐ Identification marks, tires 256
Front-seat passenger airbags, trol 165 Identification number, see ve‐
indicator lamp 138 Head airbags 136 hicle identification num‐
Front seats 76 Headlight control, auto‐ ber 10
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 268 matic 130 Idle state, operating and drive
Fuel 252 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ readiness 19

cardiagn.com
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ ture 130 iDrive 21
age fuel consumption 124 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ Ignition key, see Remote con‐
Fuel filler flap 250 ture via remote control 61 trol 54
Fuel gauge 118 Headlight flasher 103 Indication of a flat
Fuel lid 250 Headlight glass 282 tire 266, 269
Fuel quality 252 Headlights, care 292 Indicator and alarm lamps,
Fuel recommendation 252 Head restraint pillows 84 see Check Control 114
Fuel, tank capacity 300 Head restraints 76 Indicator lamp, see Check
Fuse 285 Head restraints, front 82 Control 114
Head restraints, rear 83 Individual air distribution 205
G Head-up Display 126 Individual settings, see pro‐
Head-up Display, care 294 files 58
Garage door opener, see Uni‐ Heating, see Parked-car heat‐ Inflation pressure, tires 254
versal Integrated Remote ing 209 Inflation pressure warning
Control 215 Heavy cargo, stowing 238 FTM, tires 268
Gasoline 252 High-beam Assistant 132 Information 6
Gear change, Steptronic High beams 103 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
transmission 106 High beams/low beams, see tor TPM 265
Gear shift indicator 120 High-beam Assistant 132 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
General driving notes 234 Hill Descent Control FTM 269
General settings 38 HDC 165 Instrument cluster 113
Gentleman function 78 Hills 236 Instrument lighting 133
Gesture 30 Hill start assistant, see Drive- Integral Active Steering 166
Gesture control 30 off assistant 163 Integrated key 54
Gesture operation 30 Holder for beverages 228 Integrated Owner's Manual in
Glare shield 217 Homepage 6 the vehicle 49
Glass sunroof, powered 73 Hood 272 Intelligent Emergency Re‐
Glove compartment 225 Horn 14 quest 286
Hotel function, trunk lid 65 Intelligent Safety 139

306
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Everything from A to Z Reference

Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Lamp replacement, rear 282 Maintenance system,

gram 204 Lane departure warning 150 BMW 279
Interior equipment 215 Lane margin, warning 150 Make-up mirror 217
Interior lights 133 Language, on the Control Malfunction displays, see
Interior lights during unlock‐ Display 38 Check Control 114
ing 60 Lashing eyes, securing Manual air distribution 205
Interior lights with the vehicle cargo 238 Manual air flow 205
locked 61 LATCH child restraint sys‐ Manual brake, see Parking
Interior motion sensor 70 tem 95 brake 100
Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ Launch Control 106 Manual mode, Steptronic
matic dimming feature 86 Leather, care 292 transmission 106
Internet page 6 LEDs, replace light-emitting Manual operation, door
Interval display, service re‐ diodes 282 lock 62
quirements 119 Light alloy wheels, care 293 Manual operation, exterior
Ionization, see Ambient air Light control 131 mirrors 85
package 211 Lighting 129 Manual operation, fuel filler
Lights 129 flap 250

cardiagn.com
J Lights and bulbs 282 Marking, run-flat tires 260
Light switch 129 Massage seat, front 88
Jacking points for the vehicle List of all messages 40 Massage seat, rear 88
jack 282 Load 238 Master key, see Remote con‐
Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Loading 237 trol 54
sion 106 Lock, door 62 Maximum cooling 204
Jump-starting 287 Locking, automatic 68 Maximum speed, display 120
Locking, settings 67 Maximum speed, winter
K Locking via door lock 62 tires 259
Locking with remote con‐ Measurement, units of 39
Key/remote control 54 trol 60 Medical kit 287
Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ Lock, power window 71 Memory for seat, mirrors,
cess 65 Locks, doors, and win‐ steering wheel 87
Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ dows 96 Menu in instrument clus‐
mission 106 Low beams 129 ter 121
Knee airbag 137 Low beams, automatic, see Menus 22
High-beam Assistant 132 Menus, operating, iDrive 21
L Lower back support 77 Messages 40
Luggage rack, see Roof- Messages, see Check Con‐
Label on recommended mounted luggage rack 238 trol 114
tires 259 Lumbar support 77 Microfilter 206
Lamp in the exterior mirror, Minimum tread, tires 258
see Active Blind Spot De‐ M Mirror 85
tection 153 Mirror memory 87
Lamp in the exterior mirror, Maintenance 279 Mobile communication devi‐
see crossing traffic warn‐ Maintenance require‐ ces in the vehicle 235
ing 197 ments 279 Mobility System 260
Lamp replacement 282 Maintenance, service require‐ Modifications, technical, see
Lamp replacement, front 282 ments 119 Own Safety 7

307
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Reference Everything from A to Z

Moisture in headlight 282 Oil types, alternative 275 Parked vehicle, condensa‐
Monitor, see Control Dis‐ Oil types, suitable 275 tion 236
play 21 Old batteries, disposal 285 Parking aid, see PDC 180
Mounting of child restraint Onboard computer, Control Parking assistant 193
systems 94 Display 125 Parking brake 100
Moving sun visor 217 On-board computer, instru‐ Parking lights 129
Multifunction steering wheel, ment cluster 122 Parking with Automatic
buttons 14 Onboard monitor, see Control Hold 100
Multimedia 6 Display 21 Parts and accessories 7
Onboard vehicle tool kit 281 Passenger side mirror, tilting
N Opening and closing 54 downward 85
Opening the trunk lid with no- PDC Park Distance Con‐
Navigation 6 touch activation 66 trol 180
Near-field communication 42 Opening via door lock 62 Pedestrian detection, see
Neck restraints, front, see Opening without remote con‐ Night Vision 147
Head restraints 82 trol 62 Pedestrian warning with City
Neck restraints, rear, see Opening with remote control, braking function 144

cardiagn.com
Head restraints 83 closing with remote control, Personal profile, see pro‐
Neutral cleaner, see wheel unlocking with remote con‐ files 58
cleaner 293 trol 60 Pillows 84
New wheels and tires 258 Operating concept, iDrive 21 Pinch protection system,
NFC, see near-field commu‐ Operating readiness 19 glass sunroof 75
nication 42 Operating via iDrive 22 Pinch protection system, win‐
Night Vision 147 Operating with the control‐ dows 71
Night Vision device, see Night ler 22 Plastic, care 293
Vision 147 Operation via touchscreen 25 Post Crash — iBrake 161
Nylon rope for tow-starting/ Optional equipment, standard Power failure 285
towing 289 equipment 7 Power sunroof, glass 73
Outside air, see AUC 205 Power windows 70
O Overheating of engine, see Prescribed engine oil
Coolant temperature 118 types 275
OBD Onboard Diagnosis 280 Own Safety 7 Pressure, tire air pres‐
OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ sure 254
agnosis 280 P Pressure warning FTM,
Object detection, see Night tires 268
Vision 147 Paint, vehicle 292 Profiles 58
Octane rating, see Recom‐ Pairing device 41 Profiles, see profiles 58
mended fuel grade 252 Pairing mobile phone 41 Programmable memory but‐
Odometer 123 Pairing smartphone 41 tons, iDrive 28
Oil 273 Pairing telephone 41 Protective function, glass
Oil, adding 274 Panorama View, see Sur‐ sunroof 75
Oil additives 275 round View 187 Protective function, win‐
Oil change 275 Panoramic glass sunroof 73 dows 71
Oil change interval, service Parallel parking assistant 193 Push-and-turn switch, see
requirements 119 Park Distance Control Controller 22
Oil filler neck 274 PDC 180

308
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Everything from A to Z Reference

Q Replace front lamps 282 Safety belt reminder for driv‐

Replace headlamps 282 er's seat and front passen‐
Queuing Assistant, see Replace key lights 282 ger seat 81
Steering and lane guidance Replace LED front fog Safety belts 80
assistant including Traffic lamps 282 Safety belts, care 293
Jam Assist 177 Replace LED headlights 282 Safety package, see Active
Replace light-emitting diodes, Protection 160
R LEDs 282 Safety switch, windows 71
Replacement fuse 285 Safety systems, airbags 136
Radiator fluid 277 Replace tail lamps 282 Safety systems, see Intelli‐
Radio 6 Replacing parts 281 gent Safety 139
Radio-operated key, see Re‐ Replacing wheels/tires 258 Saving fuel 240
mote control 54 Reporting safety malfunc‐ Screen, see Control Dis‐
Rain sensor 104 tions 10 play 21
Rear automatic climate con‐ RES CNCL button, see Active Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
trol 207 Cruise Control, ACC 168 hicle tool kit 281
Rear axle steering 166 RES CNCL button, see Cruise Screw thread for tow fitting,

cardiagn.com
Rear center armrest 227 control 175 see tow-starting/towing,
Rear collision prevention 159 Reserve warning, see thread for tow fitting, see
Rear collision warning 159 Range 123 tow-starting/towing 289
Rear cooler 223 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Sealant 260
Rear drink holder 228 TPM 265 Seat belts, see Safety
Rear seats 78 Retaining straps, securing belts 80
Rear seats, basic position 80 cargo 238 Seat cushion heating 91
Rear vanity mirror 86 Retreaded tires 259 Seat heating 91
Rearview camera, see Sur‐ Roadside parking lights 130 Seating position for chil‐
round View 187 Roller sunblinds 72 dren 93
Rearview camera, without RON recommended fuel Seat, mirror, and steering
Surround View 184 grade 252 wheel memory 87
Rearview mirror 85 Roofliner 18 Seats 76
Rear window defroster 206 Roof load capacity 299 Seats, front 76
Recirculated-air mode 205 Roof-mounted luggage Seats, rear 78
Recommended fuel rack 238 Seat ventilation 92
grade 252 Rope for tow-starting/ Selection list in instrument
Recommended tire towing 289 cluster 121
brands 259 Route-ahead assistant 244 Selector lever, Steptronic
Refueling 250 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ transmission 106
Remaining range 123 ponent, see Run-flat Self-leveling suspension 200
Remote control/key 54 tires 260 Sensors, care 294
Remote control, malfunc‐ Rubber components, Service and warranty 8
tion 62 care 293 Service requirements, Condi‐
Remote control, univer‐ Run-flat tires 260 tion Based Service
sal 215 CBS 279
Remote control with dis‐ S Service requirements, dis‐
play 55 play 119
Replace front fog lamps 282 Safe braking 235 Services, ConnectedDrive 6

309
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Reference Everything from A to Z

SET button, see Active SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Supplementary text mes‐
Cruise Control, ACC 168 Driving Dynamics Con‐ sage 117
SET button, see Cruise con‐ trol 110 Surround View 187
trol 175 Sport program, Steptronic Suspension settings 110
Settings, locking/unlock‐ transmission 106 Switch for Dynamic Driving
ing 67 SPORT, see Driving Dynam‐ Control 110
Settings on the Control Dis‐ ics Control 110 Switch, see Cockpit 14
play 38 Stability control systems 163 Symbols 6
Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Start/stop, automatic func‐ Symbols in the status field 27
rors, steering wheel 87 tion 98 SYNC program, automatic cli‐
Shift paddles on the steering Start/Stop button 97 mate control 206
wheel 106 Start function during malfunc‐
Shoulder support front 77 tion 55 T
Shoulder support rear 79 Starting, see drive readi‐
Side airbag 136 ness 97 Table 223
Side collision warning 156 Starting the engine, see drive Tablet 36
Signaling, horn 14 readiness 97 Tachometer 118

cardiagn.com
Signals when unlocking 68 Status control display, Technical changes, see Own
Sitting safely 76 tires 265 Safety 7
Size 298 Status information, iDrive 27 Technical data 298
Ski and snowboard bag 224 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Telephone 6
Slide/tilt glass roof 73 Status, vehicle 126 Temperature, automatic cli‐
Smoker's package 217 Steering and lane guidance mate control 204
Snow chains 264 assistant including Traffic Temperature display for ex‐
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Jam Assist 177 ternal temperature 118
nostics 280 Steering, Integral Active Temperature, engine oil 118
Sockets, see Connecting Steering 166 Tempomat, see Active Cruise
electrical devices 220 Steering wheel, adjusting 87 Control 168
Software update 46 Steering wheel heating 87 Terminal, starting aid 288
SOS button 286 Steering wheel memory 87 Text message, supplemen‐
Spare fuse 285 Steptronic Sport transmis‐ tary 117
Spare tire, see Emergency sion, see Steptronic trans‐ Theft alarm system, see
wheel 282 mission 106 Alarm system 69
Speed, average 124 Steptronic transmission 106 Thermal camera, see Night
Speed limiter, display 120 Stopping the engine, see Vision 147
Speed Limit Information 120 drive readiness 97 Through-loading system 222
Speed warning 125 Storage compartment on the Tilt alarm sensor 70
Split screen 27 center console 226 Time of arrival 124
Sport displays, torque dis‐ Storage compartments 225 Tire damage 258
play, performance dis‐ Storage compartments, loca‐ Tire identification marks 256
play 125 tions 225 Tire inflation pressure 254
SPORT drive mode, see Driv‐ Storage, tires 260 Tire inflation pressure moni‐
ing Dynamics Control 110 Storing the vehicle 294 tor, see FTM 268
SPORT INDIVIDUAL drive Suitable engine oil types 275 Tire Pressure Monitor
mode, see Driving Dynamics Summer tires, tread 258 TPM 264
Control 110 Sun visor 217 Tires, changing 258

310
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Everything from A to Z Reference

Tire sealant 260 Trunk lid, hotel function 65 Vent, see ventilation 206
Tires, everything on wheels Trunk lid, opening with no- Video 6
and tires 254 touch activation 66 VIN, see vehicle identification
Tires, run-flat tires 260 Trunk lid via remote con‐ number 10
Tire tread 258 trol 61 Vitality programs 90
Tone 6 Turn signal, bulb replace‐ Vitalization programs, see Vi‐
Tool 281 ment 282 tality programs 90
Top View, see Surround Turn signals, operation 103 Voice activation system 33
View 187
Total vehicle weight 299 U W
Touchpad 26
Touchscreen 25 Unintentional alarm 70 Warning against cross traf‐
Tow fitting see tow-starting/ Units of measurement 39 fic 197
towing 289 Universal remote control 215 Warning and indicator lamps,
Towing 289 Unlock button, Steptronic see Check Control 114
Towing, see tow-starting/ transmission 106 Warning displays, see Check
towing 289 Unlocking, automatic 68 Control 114

cardiagn.com
Tow-starting 289 Unlocking, settings 67 Warning lamp in the exterior
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ Unlocking via door lock 62 mirror, see Active Blind Spot
tor 264 Updates made after the edito‐ Detection 153
Traction control 164 rial deadline 7 Warning lamp in the exterior
TRACTION, driving dynam‐ Updating software 46 mirror, see crossing traffic
ics 164 Upholstery care 293 warning 197
Traffic Jam Assist, see Steer‐ USB interface 221 Warning messages, see
ing and lane guidance assis‐ Check Control 114
tant 177 V Warning triangle 287
Transmission lock, electronic Warranty 7
unlocking 106 Vanity mirror 217 Washer fluid 106
Transmission, see Steptronic Variable steering, Integral Ac‐ Washer nozzles, wind‐
transmission 106 tive Steering 166 shield 105
Transporting children Vehicle battery 284 Washer system 103
safely 93 Vehicle battery, replac‐ Washing, vehicle 291
Tread, tires 258 ing 284 Water on roads 235
Trip computer 125 Vehicle, break-in 234 Weights 299
Trip information, see onboard Vehicle care 292 Welcome lamps during un‐
computer on the Control Vehicle features and op‐ locking 60
Display 125 tions 7 Welcome Light Carpet, see
Triple turn signal activa‐ Vehicle identification num‐ welcome lights 130
tion 103 ber 10 Welcome lights 130
Trip odometer 123 Vehicle jack 282 Welcome screen 58
Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐ Vehicle paint 292 Wheel cleaner 293
eter 123 Vehicle status 126 Wheels, changing 258
Trunk lid, closing with no- Vehicle storage 294 Wheels, everything on wheels
touch activation 66 Vehicle wash 291 and tires 254
Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Ventilation 206 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor
ing 65 Venting, see ventilation 206 FTM 268

311
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
 Reference Everything from A to Z

Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐

tor TPM 264
WiFi 45
WiFi connection 45
Window defroster, rear 206
Windows, powered 70
Windshield washer fluid 106
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 105
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 103
Windshield washer system,
see washer/wiper sys‐
tem 103
Windshield wiper, see wiper
system 103
Winter storage, care 294

cardiagn.com
Winter tires, suitable
tires 259
Winter tires, tread 258
Wiper 103
Wiper blades, replacing 281
Wiper fluid 106
Wiper, fold-out position 105
Wiper system 103
WLAN connection 44
Wood, care 293
Word match concept, naviga‐
tion 24
Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
tool kit 281

X
xDrive 165

312
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15
cardiagn.com
More about BMW

The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine®

cardiagn.com
0140 2 964 330 ue

*BL296433000V*
Online Edition for Part no. 0140 2 964 330 - VI/15